Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX77
d
e
t
r
a
ting
e
G
DMR-EX87
st
ing
w
e
Region number supported by
Vi
this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders
and DVD-Video according to where they are
sold.
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of DMR-EX77.
≥The region number of this unit is “4”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “4” or “ALL”.
Example:
g
in
d
r
2
3
eco
R
4
ALL
4
k
c
gba
in
y
Dear customer
Pla
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Edting
This DVD Recorder is for viewing and
recording free to view channels only, not pay
TV or encrypted channels.
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
ing
y
Declaration of Conformity No. 4675,
28th March 2007 (DMR-EX77)
Cop
Declaration of Conformity No. 4674,
28th March 2007 (DMR-EX87)
Notice for DVB functions
≥Any function related to DVB (Digital Video
Broadcasting) will work in areas where
DVB-T (MPEG2) digital terrestrial
broadcasting is received. Consult your local
Panasonic dealer with coverage areas.
≥This unit has the capability for DVB
specifications. But future DVB services
cannot be guaranteed.
nt
s
ie
n
e
v
tion
c
fun
Con
≥This unit does not support MHP (Multimedia
Home Platform).
e
nc
e
r
e
f
Re
GN
RQT8859-L
Table of contents
Getting started
Editing
HDD, disc and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating playlists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Playlist operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Album and picture operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Deleting titles or pictures during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Interface) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control TM” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
STEP 3 Set up to match your television
Copying
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copying SD Video from an SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
To enjoy progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Viewing
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying all the still pictures on a card—Copy All Pictures . . . . . 57
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Watching analogue and digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . 23
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Digital channel information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Recording
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Disc Insertion/Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . . 26
Recording settings for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Convenient functions
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting the background style—Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the TV Guide system to make timer recordings
(Digital broadcast only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using G-CODE system to make timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 32
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 62
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TV System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playing back
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Reference
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and
still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG). . . . 37
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
About descriptions in these operating instructions
≥These operating instructions are applicable to models
DMR-EX77 and DMR-EX87. Unless otherwise indicated,
illustrations in these operating instructions are of DMR-EX77.
[EX77] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EX77 only.
[EX87] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EX87 only.
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➡ {{”.
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
RQT8859
3
HDD, disc and card information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
Hard disk drive (HDD)
≥[EX77] 160 GB
DVD-RAM
≥4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm
Disc type
[EX87] 250 GB
≥2.8 GB, 8 cm
Logo
–
Indicated in these
instructions by
[HDD]
[RAM]
DVD Video Recording format
This is a recording format which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
Recording format
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Still pictures
Video
Still pictures
Re-writable
≤
≤
Play on other players§2
–
Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
–
Up to 5X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
≤
≤ [CPRM (➡ 84) compatible discs only.]
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
≤
≤
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
≤
≤
≤
≤
Creating and editing
playlists
DVD-R DL§1
(dual layer on single side)
You cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
DVD-R§1
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
DVD-RW
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
Disc type
Logo
≥
[-R] before finalisation
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
Indicated in these
instructions by
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
DVD-Video format
This recording format is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.
Recording format
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
–
Video
–
Video
Re-writable
≤
Only on DVD-R DL compatible
players after finalising the disc
(➡ 62, 84).
Only after finalising the disc
Play on other players§2
Only after finalising the disc (➡ 62, 84).
(➡ 62, 84).
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 8X recording speed discs.
Up to 6X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
–
–
–
Recording both M 1 and
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 66, Bilingual
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 66,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 66,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
M 2 for bilingual
Audio Selection)]
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
≤
≤
≤
Creating and editing
playlists
–
–
–
RQT8859
(continued on the next page)
4
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(continued)
+R DL§1
(double layer on single side)
You cannot directly record to a
+R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
+R§1 §5
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
Disc type
Logo
+RW
≥
–
–
–
ion
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Indicated in these
instructions by
[+RW]
rmat
o
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format
This is a format for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
inf
d
r
You can playback such discs recorded in this format in a similar way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video
format.
Recording format
a
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the disc on DVD players and other equipment.
andc
c
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Video
–
Video
,dis
Re-writable
–
≤
Play on other players§2
Only on +R DL compatible players
after finalising the disc (➡ 62, 84).
Only after finalising the disc (➡ 62, 84).
Only on +RW compatible players.
HD
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 8X recording speed discs.
Up to 4X recording speed discs.§6
What you can do on this unit (≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
–
–
–
Recording both M 1 and
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 66,
M 2 for bilingual
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 66,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
– [Only one is recorded.(➡ 66,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
– (The picture is recorded in 4:3
– (The picture is recorded in 4:3
– (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
aspect.)
aspect.)
Creating and editing playlists
–
–
–
§1
The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the programme is deleted when you use discs that can only be used for
recording once.
[RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD Recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
The high speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.
For further information (➡ 8, Important notes for recording)
§2
§3
§4
[Note]
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 65).
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are
finalised are compatible and can be played.
§5
§6
You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs and cards. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches
and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programmes that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. (➡ 62)
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. (➡ 61)
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
first layer to record a programme, the remainder is
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
switches between layers and plays the title in the same
way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is
switching layers.
Second recordable layer
The available
space
(Inner
section of the
disc)
(Outersection
of the disc)
First recordable layer
DVD-R DL
+R DL
Title 1
Title 2
Playback direction
RQT8859
5
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times (➡ 25)
HDD, disc and card information
Play-only discs (12 cm/8 cm)
Disc type
DVD-Video
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)
Logo
Indicated in
these
[DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›]
instructions by
Instructions
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder
≥
You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if they have been
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 61) the disc, you can record to it in DVD-Video format and play it
on this unit.
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for recording.
.
Disc type
Logo
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
CD
Video CD
–
Indicated in
these
DivX
DivX
[CD]
DivX, MP3, JPEG
[VCD]
instructions by
Instructions
≥DVD-R§ with video ≥DVD-R DL§ with
≥CD-R and CD-RW§ with
video recorded in DivX
Recorded audio and
music (including CD-
R/RW§)
Recorded music and
video (including CD-R/
RW§)
recorded in DivX
video recorded in
DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW§ with
music recorded in MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW§ with still
pictures recorded in JPEG
§ Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit
and not finalised (➡ 84).
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format.
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”
≥DVD-Audio
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
TV type
Yes/No
≥Blu-ray, HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.
PAL
NTSC
PAL
≤
Multi-system TV
≤
≤
PAL TV
§1 (PAL60)
NTSC
PAL
≤
–
NTSC TV
§2
NTSC
≤
§1
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals
the picture will not be shown correctly.
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 72).
§2
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (➡ 72).
RQT8859
6
Cards you can use on this unit
Type
SD Memory Card (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card (4 GB)
miniSD Card§
MultiMediaCard
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD Card” in these operating instructions.
ion
Indicated in these instructions
by
[SD]
rmat
o
inf
Data that can be recorded and
played
Still pictures
Video (SD Video)
d
r
a
Instructions
You can insert directly into the SD Card slot.
§ A miniSD card adaptor included with the miniSD card is necessary.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 40, 56).
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
(➡ 55)
andc
c
,dis
≥SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD Card.
HD
Suitable SD Cards
≥When using 4 GB SD Memory Cards, only SD Memory Cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD Card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD Card is formatted on a PC, you
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 61, 84).
≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT 12 and FAT 16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards
in FAT 32 format.
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory
Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
≥This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD Card.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD Card.
≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
XXX: Letters
¢¢¢: Numbers
Card
DVD-RAM
(Higher folder)
DCIM
(Picture folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX
JPEG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
(Higher folder)
DCIM¢¢¢
(Picture folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX
§
IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPORT
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
§
DCIM
¢¢¢XXXXX
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
SD_VIDEO
(MPEG2 folder)
PRG¢¢¢
MOV¢¢¢.MOD
MOV¢¢¢.MOI
PRG¢¢¢.PGI
(MPEG2 information folder)
MGR_INFO
§ Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g., DCIM000, etc.).
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play
or edit the data.
RQT8859
7
Important notes for recording
Broadcast in multi-channel sound (Digital broadcast
only):
You can select the audio language when receiving audio in
multi channel broadcast [“Multi Audio” appears at the
bottom of digital channel information display (➡ 23)].
However, audio cannot be switched after recording.
Selecting Audio
for Recording
Hello
Hola
Hallo
Select the audio that you
want to record in “DVB
Multi Audio” in the on-
screen menu (➡ 43).
Bilingual broadcasts (Analogue broadcast only):
[HDD] [RAM]
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(➡ 36, Changing audio during play)
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before recording
(➡ 66, Bilingual Audio Selection)
M 1
Hello
However in the following cases, select whether to record
the main or secondary audio:
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
–Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 66, Audio Mode for XP
Recording)
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default
setting is “On”. ➡ 65)
If you record from external equipment
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
M 2
M 1
If you record from external
equipment
Hello
Hallo
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on the
external equipment.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+RW]
About the aspect
when recording a
programme
≥If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic” ➡ 65), the
programme will be recorded in the original aspect used
when recording started (including when recording started
at a commercial, etc.). If recorded with a different aspect,
select the correct aspect (“16:9” or “4:3”).
Recorded in 4:3 aspect
However, in the following case, programme will be
recorded in 4:3.
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5
hours or longer)” recording modes will be recorded in 4:3
aspect.
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 65).
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings (➡ above) are
necessary before recording to the HDD.
When you want to
copy titles in high
speed mode from
the HDD to DVD-R,
etc.
§ Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
Record to the HDD
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
HDD
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or
8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 84) compatible DVD-RAM.
When recording
the “One time only
recording”
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
broadcasts
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD]
`
(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are
deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Playing the disc
on other DVD
players
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (➡ 62).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them as a
commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§
§You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Í
/I
Í
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
∫
;
1
:/6
5/9
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE
H
RC
SEA
R
ENTE
V
O
L
Y
PLA
DIS
U
MEN
OP
T
URN
RET
NU
ME
O
N
OFF
DC
IN
9V
Finalise
EN
OP
D
UN
RO
UR
A.S
E
EP
EA
T
R
MOD
ITOR
PIC
MON
E
M
ODE
TUR
Recording to DVD- You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
R DL and +R DL
RQT8859
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
e
r
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
a
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
saving recorded content to a disc.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
dlingc
a
h
)
e
iv
≥When the HDD has been automatically entered energy save mode (➡ below), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
r
d
This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
k
dis
∫ Setup precautions
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
r
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
D(Ha
∫ While operating
≥Do not place on anything that generates
heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
DO NOT
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The
HDD may become damaged.)
ing/HD
d
r
temperature changes.
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
o
c
This unit
VCR
≥Place in an area where condensation does
not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon
where moisture forms on a cold surface
when there is an extreme change in
temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the
unit.
e
r
r
o
f
s
e
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the
display.)
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD
heads, etc.
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating
for a short time.)
not
ta
Impor
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ The HDD automatically enters energy save mode
The HDD has been automatically entered energy save mode. (The HDD continues to rotate at high speed while the unit is on. In order to extend
the life of the HDD, the HDD will be entered energy save mode if no operation has been performed for 30 minutes while there is no disc on the
disc tray.)
≥While in energy save mode play or recording may not start right away because the HDD takes time to be re-activated.
≥When not using the unit, we recommend removing the disc in the tray in order to set the HDD to the energy save mode.
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
RQT8859
9
Disc and card handling
∫ How to hold a disc or card
∫ Handling precautions
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
DO
DO NOT
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
DO
DO NOT
DO NOT
shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by
such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
DO NOT
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on
frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the
lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the
region.
RQT8859
10
Included accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of May 2007. These may be subject to change.)
∏
∏
∏
∏
∏
ion
(N2QAYB000135)
rmat
1
Remote control
1
AC mains lead
2
RF coaxial cables
2
Batteries
for remote control
1
Audio/video
cable
o
≥For use with this unit only. Do not
use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
inf
l
o
r
cont
e
mot
Thre
/
The remote control information
ies
r
o
∫ Batteries
∫ Use
es
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
≥When closing the lid, insert it from the j (minus) side.
c
c
Remote control signal sensor
a
d
e
d
u
l
/Inc
e
r
a
20
20
30
30
R6/LR6, AA
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
dlg/Unitc
7 m directly in front of the unit
dha
r
a
c
d
n
a
c
s
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Di
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 12)
RQT8859
11
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (➡ 20)
2 Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (➡ 24, 34, 40)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unnecessary recorded titles or still pictures (➡ 50)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show digital channel information (➡ 23)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (➡ 29)/Status messages (➡ 43)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (➡ 36)
8 Show Top Menu/DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 34, 35, 44)
9 Show OPTION menu (➡ 44)
>
DVD
TV
1
Í
Í
?
@
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2
3
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
: Select audio (Analogue broadcast only) (➡ 36)
; Use Colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.
≥“Red” button for System update (➡ 23)/TV Guide screen
(➡ 29)/Timer Recording screen (➡ 32)/DIRECT NAVIGATOR
(➡ 34)/Edit Favourites screen (➡ 69)/Analogue Manual Tuning
screen (➡ 71)
4 5 6
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
A
B
C
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
4
5
≥“Green” button for TV Guide screen (➡ 29)/
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 40)/Edit Favourites screen (➡ 69)
≥“Yellow” button for TV Guide screen (➡ 29)/Edit Favourites
screen (➡ 69)
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
≥“Blue” button for digital channel information (➡ 23)/TV Guide
screen (➡ 29)/Timer Recording screen (➡ 31)/Edit Favourites
screen (➡ 69)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
D
E
6
7
< Show on-screen menu (➡ 42)
I
Menu for disc playback and switching audio (Digital broadcast)
etc.
= Recording functions
8
F
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (➡ 24)
OK
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (➡ 24)
> Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (➡ 21)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system (➡ 24, 29)
A Select analogue channel (➡ 23)
B Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 58)
C Show G-CODE screen (➡ 30)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (➡ 28)
F Show FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 63)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the
main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
9
OPTION
RETURN
G
H
CREATE
:
;
<
=
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
I
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
J
K
H Create chapter (➡ 36)
I Skip approx. 30 seconds forward (➡ 36)
J Show Timer Recording screen (➡ 31)
K Skip the specified time (➡ 36)
RQT8859
12
Main unit
1
3
4
6
2
5
OPEN/CLOSE
REC
guide
e
nc
8 9
<
7
:
;
e
r
Opening the front panel
REC
e
f
Place your finger on the protruding section below the 4 and
e
press down to flip open the front panel.
r
l
o
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (➡ 20)
8 Stop (➡ 24, 35)
9 Start play (➡ 34)
: Start recording (➡ 24)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 26)
; Open/close disc tray (➡ 24, 34)
Contr
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2 Disc tray (➡ 24, 34)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 58)
4 SD Card slot (➡ below)
< Remote control signal sensor
5 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (➡ 58)
6 Display (➡ below)
Rear panel terminals (➡ 14–17)
7 Channel select (➡ 23, 24)
Inserting, Removing the SD Card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card.
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (➡ 7).
Inserting the card
Removing the card
Press on the centre of
the card.
1
2
Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.
If you are using a
miniSD card, insert it
into the miniSD card
adaptor that comes
with the card.
Pull it straight out.
ADAPTER
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD Card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the SD drive
(➡ 40, 56).
If you remove an SD Card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
The unit’s display
1
2
4
3
REC
5
6
PLAY
8
9
7
1 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast or TV Guide data.
2 Copying indicator
Lights during copy.
3
Recording
indicator
Playback
indicator
Recording/
Playback indicator
REC
REC
PLAY
PLAY
4 Timer recording indicator
5 SD Card slot indicator
6 Disc indicator
7 Drive (HDD, DVD or SD) indicator
Lights when the HDD, DVD or SD drive is selected.
8 Main display section indicator
Lights when a disc that is supported by this unit is inserted in the
tray.
9 Recording mode indicator
RQT8859
13
STEP 1 Connection
Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables
Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may
appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–B. Confirm connections not listed below with your
dealer.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB
output on this unit.
[Required]setting]
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 67)
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (➡ 67)
Connecting a television
A
To the aerial
Aerial
cable
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Red White Yellow
RF coaxial cable
(included)
4
1
2
Other connections
(➡ 16, 17)
3
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Y
Red White Yellow
PB
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
RQT8859
14
Connecting a television and VCR
B
DO NOT
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette recorder to the television,
video signal will be affected by copyright protection systems and the picture may not be
shown correctly.
Television
≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are both television and
VCR input terminals.
VCR
ion
t
c
This unit
one
C
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR
1
P
To the aerial
Aerial cable
Analogue television’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
STE
Red White Yellow
6
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Other connections
(➡ 16, 17)
5
1
Audio/Video cable
(included)
RF
coaxial
cable
(included)
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Y
Red White Yellow
PB
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
Red White Yellow
This unit’s rear panel
4
2
Audio/Video cable
RF coaxial cable
3
RF coaxial cable
(included)
Red White Yellow
VCR’s rear panel
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
Connecting a Digital television and VCR
To the aerial
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Aerial cable
Digital television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
Splitter
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yellow
6
4
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Other connections
(➡ 16, 17)
1
5
Audio/Video cable
RF coaxial cable
(included)
(included)
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
Y
PB
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
Red White Yellow
This unit’s rear panel
2
Audio/Video cable
RF coaxial cable
(included)
3
Red White Yellow
RQT8859
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
VCR’s rear panel
AUDIO OUT
15
STEP 1 Connection
Other connections
Leave “Yellow” unconnected.
§
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO
terminals
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
Y
Television’s rear panel
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
R
L
PB
PR
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
R
L
IN
IN
Red White
Red White
Component
Video cable
§
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
§
§
S Video
cable
RF
IN
Red White
Y
Audio/Video cable
(included)
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
§
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Red White
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 85) and provide a purer picture than the
S VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Use component output with progressive “Off” (The default setting
➡ 67), even if it is progressive compatible, because progressive
output can cause some flickering. This is the same for multi system
televisions using PAL mode.
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
CRT
DO NOT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Progressive output
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
This unit
For progressive output (➡ 21)
Connecting an amplifier or system component
∫ Connecting an amplifier with a digital input
∫ Connecting a stereo amplifier
terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
[Required]setting]
Amplifier’s rear panel
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 66)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an Optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (➡ 67).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
AUDIO IN
R
L
Red White
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
Audio cable
Amplifier’s
rear panel
OPTICAL IN
Red White
Optical digital
audio cable
Do not bend
Insert fully, with this
side facing up.
sharply when
connecting.
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Y
PB
This unit’s rear panel
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
RQT8859
16
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), this unit’s output can be switched
to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Preparation
From the Setup menu (➡ 67), set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”.
ion
t
c
Connecting to a TV
Connecting to a receiver
one
Television’s
rear panel
Television’s
rear panel
C
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
1
P
STE
This unit’s
rear panel
Receiver’s rear
panel
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI AV OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
This unit’s
rear panel
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel
audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed
(➡ 84) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI
cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
HDMI AV OUT
AV OUT
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible
with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI
input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all
when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot
be output.)
RQT8859
17
STEP 1 Connection
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control TM”
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 2” function.
“HDAVI Control 2” is the newest standard (current as of February, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard
is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
Preparation
1. Connect this unit to your TV or receiver with an HDMI cable (➡ 17).
2. Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➡ 67). (The default setting is “On”.)
3. Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).
4. Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment, turn the TV off/on, and then select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the
“HDAVI Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”
(When the TV is on)
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input
mode and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Easy playback
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
(When the TV is off)
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the
corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Power on link
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically
set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a
Power off link
timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording,
copying, finalising etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver
will also turn off.
§1 This button is available only when this unit is on.
§2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.
[Note]
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT8859
18
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons.
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
Using the FUNCTION
ion
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window using the TV remote control.
t
c
MENU window to
≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
operate this unit
one
C
1
P
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 70:00 SP
remote control, and press [OK].
Playback
STE
Recording
Delete
Copy
To Others
OK
RETURN
About the FUNCTION MENU
window (➡ 63).
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (➡ below) and display the Top
Menu for DVD-Video.
Using the OPTION
menu window to
operate this unit
Control Panel
Control Panel is
displayed (➡ below).
1 Press [OPTION].
e,g.,
FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU
window is displayed
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Top Menu
(➡ above).
Menu
Top Menu [DVD-V]
Menu [DVD-V]
Top menu is displayed
(➡ 35).
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
Menu is displayed
(➡ 35).
[Note]
Drive Select
Select the HDD, DVD or
SD drive
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu
for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is
copying.
Rotate RIGHT
(JPEG)
Rotate the still picture
(➡ 41).
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Rotate LEFT
(JPEG)
Zoom in (JPEG)
Zoom out (JPEG)
Enlarge or shrink the still
picture (➡ 41).
Using the “Control Panel”, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote
control.
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➡ above).
Using the Control
Panel
The Control Panel is displayed (➡ right).
≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
Control Panel
Pause
Stop
–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]:
Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.
≥While playing still pictures
–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit
the screen.
Exit
Search
Play
Search
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [Í DVD] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (➡ 67).
RQT8859
19
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
3 Press [3, 4] to select your area and
Í/ l
press [OK].
TV Aspect
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
16:9 WIDE TV
4:3 TV
16:9
Pan & Scan
Letterbox
DVD
TV
SELECT
Í DVD
Í
Í
OK
VOL
CH
RETURN
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
4 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
Numbered
buttons
and press [OK].
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen
television.
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
≥Pan & Scan: When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (➡ 85).
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
I
≥Letterbox: When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(➡ 85).
OK
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
1 Turn on the television and select the
When clock setting screen is displayed
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
In step 2, if the clock setting screen appears on the television, set
the clock manually.
This is a 24-hour clock.
Clock
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
DVB Auto-Setup starts. The unit will search for the terrestrial
digital channels.
Time
0
Date
1
:
00
:
00
.
1
.
2007
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥Terrestrial digital channels are stored into logical channels
numbers.
≥Analogue channels are preset at the time of shipping. If you
would like to add new TV channels, set them manually
(➡ 71).
Number
0
9
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
CHANGE
OK
SELECT
RETURN
1
2
Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change and press
[3, 4] to change the setting.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
DVB Auto-Setup
Please wait!
Ch 6
69
Prog. Channel Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
352
354
ABC
ABC 2
12289
12302
12302 12289
9
9
1
2
RETURN: to cancel
TV aspect setting screen (➡ above) appears.
RETURN
(➡ Go to step 4)
DVB Auto-Setup is complete when Time Zone setting screen
appears.
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (➡ 69)
The time information for your region can be obtained.
Time Zone
∫ To restart set up (➡ 72)
NSW / ACT
Victoria
Queensland
South Australia
Western Australia
Northern Territory
SELECT
Tasmania
OK
RETURN
≥If the clock setting screen is displayed (➡ right).
RQT8859
20
STEP 3 Set up to match your television and remote control
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].
DVD
TV
Setup
Í
TV Aspect
16:9
Off
PAL
Í
TV operation
buttons
Progressive
TV System
HDMI Settings
AV1 Output
AV2 Input
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Tuning
Disc
PAGE
CH
l
Video
Video
o
r
Picture
Sound
Display
2 3
1
Numbered
buttons
4 5 6
TAB
RETURN
SELECT
OK
ont
Connection
Others
ANALOGUE
CH
c
8 9
0
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
ote
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Progressive”
m
e
r
and press [OK].
d
n
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
Setup
Progressive
STATUS
On
Off
EXIT
I
ona
i
Tuning
s
i
Disc
v
FUNCTION
MENU
Picture
Sound
Display
OK
le
3,4,2,1
SELECT
OK
te
OPTION
RETURN
Connection
Others
OK
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
our
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
hy
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
tc
[OK].
Output becomes progressive.
[Note]
uptoma
t
≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube) or
a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive
compatible, progressive output can cause some flickering. Turn off
“Progressive” if this occurs (➡ 43).
e
S
EP3
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
To enjoy progressive video
ST
/
s
≥There is no output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (➡ 67).
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (➡ 85).
ting
e
s
t
1
While stopped
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
c
pe
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
s
a
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 70:00 SP
Playback
Recording
ndTV
Delete
Copy
a
To Others
OK
ings
RETURN
t
t
e
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
tions
p
e
c
e
and press [OK].
r
l
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
e
press [OK].
n
DVD
TV
Setup
ha
Í
Edit Favourites
Auto-Setup Restart
Í
Volume
C
VOL
CH
Turn TV on/off
Input select
DRIVE
SELECT
Settings for Digital Services
AV
2
Tuning
Channel
Select
Settings for Analogue Services
Disc
PAGE
CH
EP
Picture
Sound
Display
2 3
1
T
S
SELECT
TAB
4 5 6
Connection
RETURN
Others
1
Point the remote control at the television
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
01:
[0] ➡ [1]
10:
[1] ➡ [0]
(continued on the next page)
RQT8859
21
STEP 3 Set up to match your television and remote control
(continued)
When other Panasonic products
Refer to the control reference on page 21.
respond to this remote control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
Manufacturer and Code No.
Brand
Panasonic
AIWA
Code
01/02/03/04
35
Brand
Code
05/28
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
05/19/20/47
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
AKAI
27/30
24
36
33
BEJING
BEKO
33
NEC
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX
74
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
BENQ
58/59
NOKIA
25/26/27/
60/61
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
BP
09
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
10
and press [OK].
BRANDT
BUSH
10/15
05
45
ONWA
30/39/70
05
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
66
ORION
press [OK].
69
PEONY
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
05
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
64/65
05
press [1].
05
37/38
52
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
05
Control” and press [OK].
10/34
61
05
RADIOLA
SABA
05
6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD
21
10
1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press
[OK].
53
SALORA
SAMSUNG
26
63/67
32/42/43/
65/68
Remote Control
Setup
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
05/50/51
SANSUI
SANYO
05
Press “ꢀ” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
05
36
09
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
Tuning
Disc
Picture
SCHNEIDER
SEG
05/69/75/
76/77/78
To change the code on the remote control
HIKONA
HITACHI
52
SELECO
05/25
18
05/22/23/40/ SHARP
41
7 While pressing [OK], press and hold
the numbered button ([1], [2] or [3]) for
more than 5 seconds.
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
05
30
25
49
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
09
05
08
8 Press [OK].
JINGXING
TCL
31/33/66/
67/69
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
JVC
17/30/39/70
TELEFUNKEN
10/11/12/
13/14
unit’s display
KDS
52
TEVION
52
The unit’s remote control code
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
45
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
52
62
10/15/44
16/57
05
05/50/51
07/46
LOEWE
WHITE
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
WESTINGHOUSE
(➡ step 7).
MAG
52
YAMAHA
18/41
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 7).
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[Note]
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
RQT8859
22
Watching analogue and digital broadcasts
[Note] (Digital broadcast only)
≥This unit can receive Standard Definition (SD) broadcasts, but is
unable to receive High Definition (HD) broadcasts.
When High Definition (HD) programmes are broadcast, “Unable to
decode HD” is displayed in the digital channel information
(➡ below).
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
2
3
≥This unit can receive free cable television but it cannot receive paid
services.
DVD
TV
Í
Í
2
ts
VOL
CH
DRIVE
s
a
SELECT
AV
Digital channel information
While stopped
Press [STATUS ] to show the information
screen.
PAGE
CH
dc
2 3
1
oa
Numbered
buttons
3
4 5 6
lbr
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
0
7
ANALOGUE
CH
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
Programme name
Channel
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
ndgita
Station Name
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
a
Progress of the current programme
Signal Quality (➡ below)
STATUS
gue
STATUS
I
o
l
a
n
Current time
Group
OK
352 ABC2
No Signal
All Services
18:53
inga
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
Change the
group
(➡ below).
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
Encrypted
Change Favourite
h
c
t
NOW
Multi Audio
info
OK
“Red”
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
PG
a
“Blue”
Programme is broadcast in multi-channel
ol/W
This unit is a DVD recorder with an integrated DVB tuner. This
means that you can receive and record both analogue and
terrestrial digital channels without having to connect an additional
DVB receiving unit.
sound (➡ 43, DVB Multi Audio)
tr
on
The parental ratings level is displayed.
c
During scrambled broadcasting
(Cannot be viewed with this unit.)
ote
Select the channel
m
e
r
Broadcast time
d
n
1 Turn on the television and select the
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
ona
i
s
i
To select the information for other stations
Press [3, 4].
≥Press [OK] to watch the selected station.
To show detailed information about the programme
v
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
le
te
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, a digital channel information
appear automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
our
Press [STATUS ] again (only when “info ” is displayed).
y
h
≥Signal Quality
tc
≥Digital channel
No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received.
Bad Signal: Due to poor signal conditions, etc., the digital broadcast
signal has been interrupted.
No Service:No broadcasts are currently available.
uptoma
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
t
If “No Signal” or “Bad Signal” is displayed, check the
following:
≥Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
e
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
S
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
3
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
EP
≥Analogue channel
T
S
∫ To change the group to easily select one of your
favourite channels (➡ 69)
You can press the “Blue” button to change the group (e.g., TV, Radio,
Edit Favourites screen) and then press [3, 4] to select the channel.
You can also select the channel with the following steps.
1
Press [ANALOGUE CH].
2
Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.
∫ To change the length of time digital channel
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
information is displayed
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
You can change the length of time digital channel information
(➡ 67, On-Screen Messages).
∫If New service message appears
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel
settings and all created favourite groups are deleted. The
timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).
[Note]
≥By following the information sent from the station, you can check
the programme information.
≥If you record a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that is
not being received correctly, digital channel information is also
recorded and will remain visible during playback.
New Service
A New DVB Service has been found.
Start the DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting the DVB Auto-Setup will delete
the current Favourite settings and all Timer Programmes.
∫ If a software update is available, a notification is
displayed on the digital channel information
Yes
No
352 ABC2
No Signal
All Services
18:53
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
Encrypted
Change Favourite
RETURN
OK
NOW
Multi Audio
Software update
Software update
RQT8859
PG
The display/hide setting can be changed (➡ 67, New Service
Press the “Red” button to launch software update screen.
Message).
23
Recording television programmes
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
2
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥Digital channel
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
∫
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
3
5
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1
PAGE
CH
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
2 3
4 5 6
1
≥Analogue channel
Numbered
buttons
3
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
ANALOGUE
CH
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
You can also select the channel with the following steps.
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
1
2
e.g.,
Press [ANALOGUE CH].
;
Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
∫
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
STATUS
I
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
OK
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
Remaining time
on the disc
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
AUDIO
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the
Setup menu (➡ 66).
5
4
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and
turn it over.
≥[+RW] You can create Top Menu using “Create Top Menu” (➡ 62).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information
(➡ 23) is also recorded.
REC
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
≥[HDD] [RAM] (Analogue broadcast only) When “Rec for High
Speed Copy” is set to “Off” (➡ 65), you can change the
audio being received by pressing [AUDIO] during recording.
(Does not affect the recording of audio.)
[SD]
≥It is not possible to record onto a card.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
∫ To pause recording
≥Turn on this unit.
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
2
If you selected the DVD drive
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to
finalise them (➡ 62).
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up with the
arrow facing in.
Insert label-up.
Quick Start (➡ 68)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, COMPONENT
VIDEO, VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals)
From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in
about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE
button is pressed while the unit is off, the Electronic Program
Guide (EPG) displays in less than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)
Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge
set to “PROTECT” (➡ 60, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it
automatically switches to the DVD drive when a disc is
inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
≥“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.
≥Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may
take time to display the screen.
[Note]
Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
RQT8859
24
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
s
Single-
Double-
sided§1
(9.4 GB)
Recording Mode
[EX77]
[EX87]
(250 GB)
sided
+RW
(160 GB)
(4.7 GB)
(4.7 GB)
me
a
XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)
ogr
36 hours
70 hours
55 hours
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45 min.
1 hour 45 min.
onpr
SP (Standard
recording mode)
i
111 hours
2 hours
4 hours
4 hours
8 hours
2 hours
4 hours
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
s
i
v
le
LP (Long
recording mode)
138 hours
284 hours
222 hours
443 hours
EP (Extra long
8 hours
16 hours
8 hours
14 hours 20 min.
ingte
recording mode)§4 (212hours§2
)
(333hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(12 hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2
)
d
r
o
c
Approximately
9 hours with video
quality equivalent
to LP mode.
FR (Flexible
284 hours
Recording
maximum
Mode)§4
8 hours
443 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
Re
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
for one side
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 65).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode , you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R or +RW discs.
§4
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
≥[HDD] You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
≥[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
≥[+R] [+RW] You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.
Disc Insertion/Ejection
When the format confirmation screen is displayed
When removing a recorded disc
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Finalise
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the disc now ?
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.
Yes
No
SELECT
RETURN
OK
∫ To finalise the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu” (➡ 62), “Auto-Play Select” (➡ 62) or
“Disc Name” (➡ 60) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format” (➡ 61)
RQT8859
∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
25
Recording television programmes
Recording settings for High Speed
Copy
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
When copying in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set “Rec
for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “On”. ➡ 65)
∫
1
¥ REC
However, some restrictions apply:
Refer to the “Selecting Audio for Recording” and “About the
aspect when recording a programme” for more information (➡ 8).
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
[Note]
2 3
4 5 6
1
If you do not intend to copy titles in high speed mode to DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”.
Numbered
buttons
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
∫
1
STATUS
STATUS
I
FUNCTION
MENU
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
OK
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
OK
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00
,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 28) or while using
Flexible Recording (➡ 27).
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT8859
26
5
When you want to start recording
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
and press [OK].
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
≥Recording starts.
XP
SP
LP
EP
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
s
∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
e.g., HDD
me
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
a
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
HDD
To stop recording partway
Remaining
time of
recording
REC 0:59
21 DVB
ABC2
Press [∫].
ogr
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
L R
onpr
[HDD]
i
s
i
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
v
le
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space
Playing while you are recording
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc
[HDD] [RAM]
ingte
d
r
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
o
c
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
If you try to record a 90 minute
programme in XP mode, only the
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc
and the 30 minute balance will not
Re
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
get recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.
To stop play
Press [∫].
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.
1
2
Press [∫].
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].
Necessary space for recording
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
1
While stopped
and press [OK].
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
backward.
and press [OK].
To stop play
Press [∫].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
and press [OK].
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Flexible Rec
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.
Record in FR mode.
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.
To stop recording
After play stops
Set rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
Start
Cancel
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
Press [∫].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
3
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.
To stop timer recording
After play stops
1
2
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
If the recording is on the other drive
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
Press [∫].
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
3
4
[Note]
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
RQT8859
27
Timer recording
1 Press [GUIDE].
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
Sat 13.01.07 19:45
Favourite
All Services
TV Guide:
ABC 1
Landscape
Prog. Type
All Types
Sat 13.01.
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
W
X
Í/I
CH
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
News
News
DVD
TV
Í
Í DVD
Í
News
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
Favourite
PAGE
CH
SELECT
TIMER REC
Info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
2 3
1
RETURN
Page
W X
CH
4 5 6
ANALOGUE
CH
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
programme.
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
3 Press [OK].
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
1:58 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
STATUS
HDD
DVD
STATUS
EXIT
I
Name
Date
Start
16:00
Stop
17:00
Mode
GUIDE
1 ARD 15. 7. TUE
HDD SP
All Services : ARD
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Programme Name
3,4,2,1
OK
OK
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 31, step 3).
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
“Green”
“Blue”
“Yellow”
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
mdorise pgilralsyed.
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
15:30
16:00
16:30
0
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
Timer icon
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Abenteuer...
ꢀ
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
[Note]
If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 72), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 24).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 73).
∫ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide
screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK].
(Confirmation screen appears.)
2 Press [2] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV Guide
disappears.)
Using the TV Guide system to make
timer recordings (Digital broadcast only)
The TV Guide system provides programme information from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine. Setting up to record a broadcast is easy too.
Simply select the desired programme from the displayed list. You
can also search for desired programmes by displaying only the
programmes in a certain group.
∫ When the unit displays “No information
available for analogue services” or the empty TV
Guide list
Sat 13.01.07 19:45
TV Guide:
ABC 1
Sat 13.01.
Landscape
Prog. Type
All Types
Favourite
All Services
[Note]
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are lost.
The “empty” field
≥The programme list is available immediately if this unit has found a
digital station and loaded the information in the memory. This
process can take a while depending on the particular station.
≥The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the
background when the unit is turned on. That means that the
programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it.
≥Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually or with the G-CODE
system (➡ 30, 31).
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually or with the G-CODE system (➡ 30,
31).
[Note]
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
≥Programme information about analogue broadcasts is not
displayed in the TV Guide system and “No information available for
analogue services” is displayed.
Before using the TV Guide system
The television programme list is not displayed immediately after
purchasing this unit.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 32)
∫
To release the unit from recording standby
32)
(➡
RQT8859
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 32)
28
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or group
Operations in the TV Guide system
Basic operations
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme
type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or group (e.g. TV, Radio).
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and
Portrait view.
1
From the desired programme type
Landscape view
Sat 13.01.07 19:45
Favourite
TV Guide:
ABC 1
Sat 13.01.
Landscape
g
Prog. Type
All Types
All Services
Press the “Yellow” button to display
in
d
r
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
the list of programme type.
o
From the desired group
News
News
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of groups.
rec
e
m
i
News
T
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
Favourite
SELECT
TIMER REC
Info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
item.
RETURN
Page
Prog.Type
All Types
Favourite
All Services
All Types
Movies
News
All Services
Free TV
Radio
Favourite 1
Favourite 2
Favourite 3
Favourite 4
Portrait view
Entertainment
Sat 13.01.07 19:45
Favourite
All Services
TV Guide:
ABC 1
Sat 13.01.
Portrait
Prog. Type
All Types
Sport
Children’s
Education
Lifestyle
ABC 1
ABC 2
Art/Culture
3 Press [OK].
≥A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.
≥When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
-24 Hr
SELECT
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
Favourite
TIMER REC
RETURN
Page
Info
Page
Guide Change Display Mode
Sat 13.01.07 19:45
Favourite
TV Guide:
ABC 1
Sat 13.01.
Landscape
e.g., Programme
type, “News” is
selected in step
2 of Landscape
view.
Prog. Type
News
All Services
To change channels Landscape view
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
Portrait view
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.
News
News
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.
News
To view a
≥Jump ahead 24 hours
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
Favourite
programme list for
another day
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
SELECT
TIMER REC
Info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
RETURN
Page
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
[Note]
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic
areas. This function does not work properly unless the
information which distinguishes the programme type and
groups sent from broadcast stations is correct.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
To browse through
the TV Guide list
Press [W X CH].
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
Press [STATUS
].
programme.
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time,
description) is available for these
programmes.
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected
the programme type or groups
symbol)
TV Guide
Sat 13.01.07 19:45
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Services” of the
groups in step 2 above.
Sat 13.01.
Spending Other People’s Money
ABC ONE, Lifestyle
19:30-20:00. 30min.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
A
flashy car salesman loses his cool when stingy friend
takes over his wallet. He’s lorced to sell his possessions
at car boot sale to pay for food.
a
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TIMER REC
RETURN
Return to List
Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.
To show other pages
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).
Press [STATUS
programme list.
] again to return to the
RQT8859
29
Timer recording
Using G-CODE system to make timer
recordings
DVD
TV
Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You can
Í DVD
Í
Í
find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers and magazines.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
[Note]
PAGE
CH
The G-CODE system is not supported for digital broadcasts.
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
ANALOGUE
CH
1 Press [G-Code].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
G-Code
Record
Remain
0
SELECT
G-Code
12:53:00 15. 7. TUE
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.
I
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter
3,4,2,1
OK
OK
the G-CODE number.
OPTION
RETURN
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
“Blue”
3 Press [OK].
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
REC MODE
1:58 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
HDD
DVD
Name
Date
Start
19:00
Stop
20:00
Mode
SP
2A ARD 15. 7.TUE
HDD
All Services : ARD
Programme Name
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 31, step 3).
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
4 Press [OK].
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
No. Name
01
Timer icon
ꢀ
ARD
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 24).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 73).
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Drive
HDD
space
Mode
SP
Stop
20:00
DVD
Check to make sure “OK”
HDD
OK
is displayed (➡ 33).
Programme
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 32)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
G-CODE is a registered trademark of
Gemstar Development Corporation. The
G-CODE system is manufactured under
license from Gemstar Development
Corporation.
(➡ 32)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 32)
RQT8859
30
Manually programming timer
recordings
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
Recording
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
g
HDD
Drive
No. Name
F01 ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
Start Stop
20:00
DVD Mode
space
in
HDD
19:00
SP
OK
d
r
New Timer Programme
o
rec
e
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
m
i
Programme” and press [OK].
T
3 Press [1] to move through the items
and change the items with [3, 4].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
Recording
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
HDD
DVD
Name
Date
Start
22:00
Stop
22:30
Mode
2A ARD 15. 7.TUE
HDD SP
All Services : ARD
Programme Name
≥When “Name” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button to
change the group [e.g., TV, Radio, Edit Favourites screen
(➡ 69)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel you
want to record.
≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
≥Date
[. Date:
Current date up to one month later minus
one day
l
l
l
;:
Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
;:
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 33, Relief Recording).
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 33)
ON!)OFF
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].
(➡ 59, Entering text)
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
No. Name
01
Timer icon
ꢀ
ARD
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Drive
HDD
space
Mode
SP
Stop
20:00
DVD
Check to make sure “OK”
HDD
OK
is displayed (➡ 33).
Programme
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 32)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 32)
RQT8859
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 32)
31
Timer recording
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
DVD
TV
Í
Í
1
While the unit is on
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive and press [∫].
Stop Recording
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
4 5 6
ANALOGUE
CH
Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
8 9
0
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
DELETE ¢
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Cancel
Stop Recording
SELECT
RETURN
OK
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
∫
STATUS
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
I
Recording” and press [OK].
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
3,4,2,1
OK
OK
OPTION
RETURN
OPTION
“Red”
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
To release the unit from recording
standby
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press the “Red” button.
≥The timer icon “F” (➡ 33) disappears from the timer
recording list.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (➡ 33) remains in the timer
recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.
Notes on timer recording
≥When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a
different TV system cannot be played unless the TV system is
changed in the Setup menu (➡ 72) or the timer recording has
completed or has been cancelled.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (➡ 51).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
Recorded
RQT8859
32
Check, change or delete a programme
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
Relief Recording
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
g
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-
Icons
in
F
[
W
Timer recording standby is activated.
This programme is currently recording.
The times overlap those in another programme.
Recording of the programme with the later start time
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 34).
d
r
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
o
rec
e
m
i
Auto Renewal Recording
T
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
F
X
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The material was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ right column).
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [OK].
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
Date
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
HDD
Start Stop DVD
Drive
Mode
No. Name
space
[OK].
New Timer Programme
1:58 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
HDD
DVD
RENEW
ON
Name
Date
SUN
Start
22:00
Stop
Mode
SP
2A ARD
22:30 HDD
All Services : ARD
Press OK to store new programme.
Programme Name
OK
RETURN
[Note]
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
! :
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to
the HDD.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (➡ 31,
step 3)
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT8859
33
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—
Direct Navigator
2
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(This function does not work with finalised discs.)
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥Thumbnail Display
≥Table Display
∫
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
008
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
3
VIDEO
PICTURE
VIDEO
PICTURE
Í
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
- - -
007
VOL
CH
DRIVE
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
SELECT
AV
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
1
Rec time
0:52(SP)
PAGE
CH
- - -
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
2 3
1
Numbered
buttons
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
Page 01/01
4 5 6
OK
OK
Previous
Select
OPTION
Next
Select
OPTION
ANALOGUE
CH
RETURN
RETURN
8 9
7
G-Code
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
1 Press [OPTION] while Thumbnail Display is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Display” and press [OK].
≥The display appearance last used is saved even after the unit is
turned off.
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
6, 5
:, 9
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
3
∫
;
STATUS
[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to
playback from many titles.
I
DIRECT
2;, ;1
NAVIGATOR,
“Top Menu”
1 Press [OPTION].
OK
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
RETURN
OPTION
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
AUDIO,
“Red”
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
CREATE
CHAPTER
TIME SLIP
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to “PICTURE”
Direct Navigator screen, the sorted Title View will be cancelled.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours
or longer)” recording mode.
2 [HDD] [RAM]
≥If you recorded to a +R or +RW.
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
≥If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the
Setup menu (➡ 65).
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
VIDEO
PICTURE
However, if you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for
High Speed Copy” was set to “Off” in the Setup menu (➡ 65), the
aspect will remain 16:9.
- - -
007
008
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[OK].
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.
Preparation
e.g.,
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5:
15:
115:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
5:
15:
[0] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [5]
≥Turn on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
To show other pages
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥It is possible to watch playback from one drive while
recording on another (editing is not possible).
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK]. (Thumbnail Display only)
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
2
If you selected the DVD drive
To exit the screen
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
Direct Navigator screen icons
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
[
Currently recording.
∫ Cartridge disc
Title protected.
Insert label-up.
Insert label-up with the
arrow facing in.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]
t
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function (➡ 24)
(➡ 33, Relief Recording)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 84, CPRM)
3 Press [1] (PLAY).
Title recorded using a different encoding system
(NTSC)
(PAL)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
DivX
(➡ 72).
DivX Menu screen appears (➡ 38).
≥When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (➡ 60), play automatically starts when
inserted in the unit.
RQT8859
34
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
If “ENTER” appears on the screen, press [OK].
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
s
c
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
is
d
y
You can also return to the menu screen with the following steps.
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].
-onl
y
[VCD] Press [RETURN].
pla
ng
[Note]
i
y
≥When recording while the “TV System” is set to “PAL”, discs recorded in NTSC format cannot be played. To play, change the “TV System” to
“NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 72).
/Pla
≥It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen
and so on.
ts
n
nte
o
c
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 72).
o
de
i
v
d
e
d
r
Operations during play
o
c
e
Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
r
Stop
ing
y
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
a
l
P
Stopped position
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is cleared.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
[CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.
≥Depending on the disc, Search may not be possible.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.
Skip
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
≥DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning of the title currently playing.
Press the numbered buttons.
Starting from a selected
title
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.
≥[HDD]
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥MP3 and JPEG
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥This works only when stopped (➡ right, Screen saver is displayed on the
television.) with some discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Quick View
[HDD] [RAM]
RQT8859
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
(Continued on the next page)
35
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to the control reference on page 34.
Operations during play
(continued)
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Slow-motion
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Frame-by-frame
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
Skipping the specified
time (Time Slip)
-
5 min
This automatically
disappears after
approximately 5
and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute
intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute
intervals.)
seconds. To show the
screen again press
[TIME SLIP] again.
(This function does not work with
finalised discs.)
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, skip approx. 30 seconds forward.
Manual Skip
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(This function does not work with
finalised discs.)
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.
Create Chapter
(➡ 44, Title/Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]
Changing audio during play
(Analogue broadcast only)
Press [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
LR>L>R
[DVD-V]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 42, Soundtrack).
^---------------}
HDD
PLAY
1 ENG
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
e.g., English is selected.
e.g., “L R” is selected
L R
[Note]
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 66).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 65).
RQT8859
36
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)
DivX
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥[CD] Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
Playable
discs
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
File
format
DivX
≥Files must have the extension
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
)
G
E
P
J
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
Number
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
es(
of folders (including the root folder)
ur
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files
t
Number
of files
Support
version
Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with
standard playback of DivX media files.
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
Video
lpic
st
d
n
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
–Number of stream: Up to 1
csa
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
3dis
§4 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard
established by Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA).
MP
cs,
i
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
d
vX
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on how
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
MP3
ngDi
Playable
discs
[CD]
y
a
l
[CD]
File
MP3
Root
Structure of MP3 folders
cs/P
format
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
(folder=group)
001
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
is
d
y
Number
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
of folders 300 folders (groups)
(groups)
(including the root folder)
onl
-
002 group
y
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1
3000 files (tracks)
:
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
Number
of files
003 group
pla
(tracks)
g
n
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Order of play
yi
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz
frequency
/Pla
s
t
[CD]
n
e
Root
Structures of still pictures
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.
ID3 tags
not compatible
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
ont
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
002 Folder
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
Still pictures (JPEG§2
)
Playable
discs and
cards
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [SD]
videoc
003 Folder
d
e
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
004 Folder
d
File
format
File format: JPEG
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
cor
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Order of play
Number
of pixels
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
ingre
y
a
l
P
Number
of
folders§3
[CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable:300
folders (including the root folder)
[Note]
You cannot playback DivX or still pictures (JPEG) while recording or
copying.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders (including higher folders)
[CD] Maximum number of files recognizable§1:3000
files
Number
of files§3
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files
MOTION
JPEG
not supported
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and
other types of files is 4000.
§2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
§3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
RQT8859
37
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)
Playing DivX discs
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
You can play DVD-R, DVD-R DL and CD-R/CD-RW discs which
contain DivX video contents that have been recorded on a computer.
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
Folder1
:
00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
No.
001
Name of Title
Tree
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
ABC.avi
:, 9
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
1
∫
STATUS
STATUS
Page
001/001
Total Title : 001
I
OK
RETURN
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
FUNCTION
MENU
≥Files are treated as titles.
OK
≥When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column selecting “DivX”
in step 4 to change the playback mode.
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
RETURN
“Green”
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
OPTION
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
Selecting file type to play
[CD]
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
You can play CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3 files, DivX
video contents or still pictures that have been recorded on a
computer.
To stop playing
Press [∫].
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG).
e.g.,
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Play mode is set to DivX.
To play another type of file,
select the file type
[Note]
from ''Playback'' in FUNCTION MENU.
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD
drive.
≥When playing the file displayed on the screen
Press [OK].
≥When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the
screen
Follow the steps below.
To select file type
Using the tree screen to find a folder
1 Press [RETURN].
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
FUNCTION MENU
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)
Play Mode : DivX
Playback
Recording
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
Copy
Folder
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
To Others
OK
F
1/21
RETURN
12.02.2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press
[OK].
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
DATA2
OK
RETURN
Playback
Select file type.
DivX
2 Press [
3
,
4] to select a folder and press [OK].
MP3
The file list for the folder appears.
JPEG
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
4 Press [3, 4] to select playback mode and press
[OK].
If “DivX” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in the right
column.
If “MP3” is selected: Go to “Playing MP3 discs” step 2
on page 39.
If “JPEG” is selected: Go to “Playing still pictures” step 4 on page
40.
RQT8859
38
Regarding DivX VOD content
Playing MP3 discs
[CD]
You can play CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3 files that have
been recorded on a computer.
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
)
G
E
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 68, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
P
J
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DivX Registration
Setup
es(
Selected group
ur
t
DivX (R) Video On Demand
No.
Group
My favorite
MP3 Menu
1
Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
:
G: Group No.
G
1
Tuning
Track
Tree
T
1
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL: Track No./Total
tracks in all groups
001 Both Ends Freezing
TOTAL
8 alphanumeric
characters
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
lpic
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint It Yellow
006 Pyjamamama
007 Shrimps from Mars
008 Starperson
1/111
Disc
st
Picture
Sound
Display
Number
d
n
0
–
9
Prev.
Next
8
SELECT
OK
9
10
009 Velvet Cuppermine
010 Ziggy Starfish
csa
Connection
Others
OK
RETURN
Page 001/024
RETURN
3dis
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
≥When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in
“To select file type” on page 38 selecting “MP3” in step 4 to change
the playback mode.
MP
cs,
i
d
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
vX
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
ngDi
y
a
l
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
P
15:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired” is displayed.)
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
–you press [Í DVD].
–you press [∫].
Using the tree screen to find a group
–you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
–timer recording starts on the HDD.
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
MP3 Menu
Tree
G
T
TOTAL
8
14
MP3 music
G
7/25
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
40/111
Number
You cannot select groups
that contain no compatible
files.
0
–
9
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
SELECT
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[OK].
The file list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT8859
39
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)
Refer to the control reference on page 38.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Playing still pictures
album and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [SD]
e.g., HDD
PICTURE
HDD
Album Name 103__DVD
0001
0002
0006
----
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
≥You can playback still pictures recorded onto a CD-R/CD-RW on a
PC.
≥You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (➡ 7).
≥You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, Removing the SD Card (➡ 13)
0005
0009
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
Select
OPTION
RETURN
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below)
is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Album View” and then press [OK] to
display the Album View screen shown in step 2.
SD Card
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to select the previous or next album.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
SELECT
RETURN
OK
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 41)
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD, DVD or SD drive.
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
The indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
Album View screen
VIDEO
PICTURE
- - -
001
002
Recording date of the
first picture in the
1. 1. 06 Total
Date: 1. 1.2006
5
1. 2. 06 Total
Date: 1. 2.2006
3
- - -
- - -
- - -
album/number of
pictures/album name.
Page 01/01
OPTION
Previous
Next
OK
Press OK to show
pictures.
Slide Show
RETURN
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
[HDD] [RAM] If “VIDEO” is selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
≥[CD]
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
103__DVD
Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Folder
0001
0005
0009
0002
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
0006
----
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
RETURN
(➡ Go to step 4)
When the DivX or MP3 Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4
in “To select file type” on page 38 selecting “JPEG” in step 4 to
change the playback mode.
Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 41)
RQT8859
40
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start Slide Show
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Slide Show Setting
)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
G
E
P
J
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
1
While the Album View screen is displayed
es(
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].
ur
t
2
[CD]
lpic
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].
st
d
n
≥To change the display interval
csa
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [OK].
3dis
≥Repeat Play
MP
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
cs,
i
d
vX
1 While playing
Rotate
Rotate RIGHT
Press [OPTION].
Rotate LEFT
OK
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and
ngDi
RETURN
y
press [OK].
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
–[CD] Still pictures
a
l
P
–When disc or album is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
≥If you remove the SD Card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation
information may not be properly stored. Remove the SD Card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen.
1 While playing
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate RIGHT
Press [OPTION].
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].
≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and
press [OK].
OK
RETURN
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than
640 a 480 pixels.
While playing
e.g., HDD
Press [STATUS ] twice.
Properties
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1. 1. 2005
No.
3 / 9
To exit the picture properties screen
Shooting date
Press [STATUS ].
∫ To select the still pictures in another folder
[RAM] [SD] (➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
To switch to another higher folder
[CD]
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
(Only if there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable)
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
Folder
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [OK].
Folder
103__DVD
F
1/3
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
021216_0026
103_DVD
Select Folder
104_DVD
105_DVD
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
----
----
Press OK to set.
SELECT
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
OK
RETURN
OK
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [OK].
RQT8859
41
Using on-screen menus/Status message
Subtitle§
[DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ below,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
4 5 6
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
0
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Angle§ [DVD-V]
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
(➡ 36, Changing audio during play)
Source Select (DivX)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
STATUS
I
OK
≥Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents
is automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using interlace.
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
DISPLAY
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
≥Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using progressive.
PBC (Playback control) (➡ 85) [VCD]
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
§ With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the
menus (➡ 35) on the disc.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
Audio attribute
LPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
Using on-screen menus
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Common procedures
Language
1 Press [DISPLAY].
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
DAN: Danish
THA: Thai
Disc
Î Digital 2/0 ch
1
Soundtrack
Subtitle
POR: Portuguese
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
POL: Polish
CES: Czech
SLK: Slovak
HUN: Hungarian
FIN: Finnish
Play
Off
Picture
Sound
Other
L R
Audio channel
Menu
Item
Setting
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
MAL: Malay
¢:
Others
VIE: Vietnamese
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
Play menu—Change the play sequence
press [1].
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
Repeat Play
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥All
≥Chapter
[CD][VCD]
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
MP3
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [VCD] and MP3
≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
≥Track
Soundtrack§
Select “Off” to cancel.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V]
Select the audio and language (➡ right, Audio attribute,
Language).
DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
RQT8859
42
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Dialog Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
and DivX
Playback NR
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive§ (➡ 85)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
e
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
g
a
Other menu—Change the display position
Position
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]
mes
s
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 84, Film and video).
u
t
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu
moves.
a
/St
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
s
u
n
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
me
Status messages
During playback or recording
en
re
c
s
-
Press [STATUS ].
n
The display changes each time you press the button.
o
g
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
in
Selected drive status/type of disc
HDD
s
U
The remaining time appears here while stopped.
Recording or play status/input channel
PLAY
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration to the right, then select
“Auto”.
REC
Channel (Analogue broadcast)
The name of the station (Digital broadcast).
Selected audio type
ABC
When the output signal is NTSC
L R
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
DVD REC
≥Auto1
(normal):
≥Auto2:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
≥Video:
Date and time
AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)
π
Remain
18:53:50 11.10.
13:50 XP
Reduces video tape noise while copying.
π T1 0:05.14 XP π T2 0:00.10 XP
≥Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
Title number and elapsed time during
a video tape.
recording/Recording mode
≥On:
≥Off:
Noise reduction works for input video.
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input
signal as it is.
No display
§ Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 21).
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
DVB Multi Audio
[Digital channel only]
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the
desired channel before recording.
≥DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
≥English ≥German ≥Italian
≥Spanish ≥Original§
≥French
§ “Original” is displayed when a broadcast is only available in
the original language.
V.S.S.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround
function on the connected equipment.)
≥V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.
RQT8859
43
Editing titles/chapters
DVD
TV
Í
Í
1
2
During play or while stopped
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM]
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
4 5 6
Press the “Red” button to select
“VIDEO”.
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
0
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SKIP
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View
VIDEO
PICTURE
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
;
1
Title View screen
HDD
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
- - -
007
008
STATUS
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
I
- - -
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
OK
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
3,4,2,1
OK
Select Previous
Next
OPTION
RETURN
OK
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
OPTION
“Red”
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(You cannot edit finalised discs.)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Title/Chapter
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
4
5
Press [OPTION].
Title
Chapter
Press [3,
4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
Start
End
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK]. (➡ 45)
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points becomes a chapter.
(➡ 36, 45, Create Chapter)
Enter Name
Set up Protection
Title
Cancel Protection
Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 45).
Partial Delete
Delete
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Change Thumbnail
Properties
Edit
Divide Title
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
Chapter View
Table Display
Album View
playlist (➡ 46).
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance ➡ 34
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
Playing still pictures ➡ 40, step 3
[HDD]
–Titles:
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
500
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
6
Press [
3
,
4
,
2
,
1
] to select the chapter.
–Titles:
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
–Chapters:
Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
To edit ➡ Step 7.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
Chapter View screen
VIDEO
[Note]
HDD
008 ARD 11.10. SAT
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:31.24
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
7
Press [OPTION], then [
the operation and press [OK].
3
,
4] to select
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Delete Chapter
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
Create Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 45).
Combine Chapters
Title View
Preparation
≥You can go back to Title View.
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 60).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT8859
44
Title operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ 44)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
s
er
t
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
Properties
Properties
p
a
Dinosaur
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
h
No.
026
Time
12:19
c
/
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Name ARD
es
l
t
i
You can give names to recorded titles.
(➡ 59, Entering text)
Enter Name
t
g
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
in
it
Set up Protection§
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
Ed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title V
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
Cancel Protection§
007
008
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.
VIDEO
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
Partial Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)
HDD
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
008
PLAY
Start
End
Next
Finish
0:43.21
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
Change Thumbnail
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
VIDEO
HDD
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ꢀ
008
Change
(➡ below, For your reference)
Finish
0:00.00
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at
the point you want to change.
Start play and select the image
Change
of a thumbnail.
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
You can divide a title into two.
Divide Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Divide Title
VIDEO
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Preview
(➡ below, For your reference)
Divide
Finish
0:43.21
To confirm the division point
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the
title.
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 84) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
§ Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ 44)
Delete Chapter§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
[HDD] [RAM]
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.
Create Chapter
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
VIDEO
HDD
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
Create
Finish
(➡ below, For your reference)
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
0:43.21
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
Combine Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
§ Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use search (➡ 35), Time Slip (➡ 36) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 36) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 36).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT8859
45
Creating, editing and playing playlists
DVD
TV
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
Í
Í
VOL
CH
press [OK].
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
2 3
4 5 6
1
and press [OK].
ANALOGUE
CH
Playlists
HDD
- -
Playlist View
8 9
7
- -
- -
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Create
- -
- -
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title
STATUS
EXIT
I
and press [4].
≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to
step 7.
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
3,4,2,1
OK
OPTION
Create
Playlists
HDD
OPTION
RETURN
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
002
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
Chapters in Playlist
---
You can arrange the chapters (➡ 44) to create a playlist.
---
---
Title
Title
OK
OPTION
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
Playlist
Chapter
Chapter
[OK].
Press [3] to cancel.
Create
Playlists
HDD
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Copying (➡ 51) a playlist will create a title.
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles
and source chapters.
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
---
OK
OPTION
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
[HDD] [RAM]
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]
(➡ 45, Create Chapter).
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
–Playlists:
99
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
insert the chapter and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
Create
Creating playlists
[HDD] [RAM]
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
Preparation
003
---
---
---
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate Video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 60).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 72).
OK
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
8 Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
To exit the screen
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Press [EXIT].
and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Timer Recording
G-Code Record
Playback
Recording
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Delete
Copy
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
To Others
OK
Setup
RETURN
HDD Management
RQT8859
46
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
Playlist operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[OK].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
1
While stopped
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
s
t
s
i
l
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
y
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
and press [OK].
Properties
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
ingpla
Properties
press [OK].
y
Dinosaur
No.
10
Date 12.10.2006 TUE
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53
ndpla
playlist.
RETURN
OK
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 5.
(➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)
Create
tinga
d
Playlists
HDD
01
Playlist View
- -
Playlist View screen
[HDD] [RAM]
- -
Copy§
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[OK].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.
12.10. SUN 0:30
- -
Create
- -
ting,e
- -
[HDD] [RAM]
a
e
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Cr
You can give names to playlists.
(➡ 59, Entering text)
Enter
Name
[HDD] [RAM]
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
(➡ 45, Change Thumbnail)
Change
Create
Thumbnail
Copy
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
[HDD] [RAM]
Enter Name
Delete
Change Thumbnail
Properties
§ Multiple editing is possible.
Edit
Chapter View
Chapter operations
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
(➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)
Add
chapter.
Chapter
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [OK].
Move
Chapter
Chapter View screen
Playlists
HDD
Chapter View
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
Playlists
HDD
Move Chapter
001
002
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:10.24
0:19.36
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
002
---
---
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:10.24
0:19.36
---
---
---
---
---
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)
7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Add Chapter
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
OK
RETURN
(➡ 45, Create Chapter)
Create
Chapter
Move Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
(➡ 45, Combine Chapters)
Combine
Chapters
Playlist View
(➡ 45, Delete Chapter)
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.
≥You can go back to Playlist View.
Delete
Chapter§
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
§ Multiple editing is possible.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT8859
47
Editing still pictures
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2
[HDD] [RAM]
DVD
TV
Í
Í
Press the “Green” button to select
“PICTURE”.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
3
Editing an album:
2 3
1
Select the album to be edited and press
4 5 6
ANALOGUE
CH
[OPTION].
8 9
7
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [OPTION] without selecting album.
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
Editing a still picture:
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
;
1 Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [OK].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
STATUS
I
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
OK
3,4,2,1
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
OK
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
OPTION
“Green”
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
∫To edit the album
(e.g., [SD])
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (➡ 7).
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on CD-R/CD-RW.
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 41)
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).
Add Pictures
Create Album
Edit Album
Enter Album Name
Delete Album
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Select Folder
Album and picture operation (➡ 49)
[RAM] [SD]
This is only displayed when there are other higher
folders that can be viewed.
To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)
∫To edit still picture
(e.g., [SD])
Delete Picture
Album and picture operation (➡ 49)
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
You can go back to Album View.
Album View
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT8859
48
Album and picture operation
After performing steps 1–4, page 48
Delete Picture§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Delete Album§
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
s
e
≥When deleting an album, files other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This
does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)
ur
t
You can give names to albums.
(➡ 59, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
Enter Album Name
lpic
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
i
t
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
SD CARD
Pic
103__
ings
t
i
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Album Name
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album
may be deleted by another unit.
Ed
0001
0002
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press [OK].
Add Pictures
Create Album
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
2
3
4
e.g.,
1
Create Album
HDD
Step
Please select album to copy.
- - -
007
008
12. 5.06 Total 24
100_DVD
- - -
12. 6.06 Total 3
101_DVD
- - -
- - -
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
OK
Previous
Next
RETURN
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album that contains the still picture you want
to add and press [OK].
Create Album
e.g.,
Which pictures to copy from the selected album?
Select pictures to copy
Copy all pictures
SELECT
RETURN
OK
[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Select Folder” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [OK].
3Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected
Select the still picture you want to add and press [OK].
≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
4Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [OK].
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step ➁.
Only for “Create Album”
5Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [OK].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (➡ 59, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The recording date of the first picture in the album becomes the album name. (If there is no recording
date information, the date will appear as [--.--.----].)
Press [2] to select “Start” and press [OK].
You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.
Copy to DVD-RAM
[HDD]
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
§ Multiple editing is possible.
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add Pictures”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
≥You cannot perform “Add Pictures” or “Create Album” to a higher folder.
RQT8859
49
Delete Navigator
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
1
While stopped
DVD
TV
Í
Í
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
press [OK].
2 3
4 5 6
1
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Title View
VIDEO
PICTURE
- - -
- - -
007
008
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
DELETE
¢
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
OK
Select
OPTION
Previous
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
Next
STOP
RETURN
;
STATUS
[HDD] [RAM] To switch to the other view
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
EXIT
I
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
3
If you want to delete a title:
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
RETURN
“Green”
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
title and press [OK].
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
If you want to delete an album:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [DELETE ¢].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
If you want to delete a still picture:
≥A title or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make
certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
that contains the still picture you want to
delete and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).
You can confirm the titles or pictures etc. that you have
selected using the option menu.
∫ Available disc space after deleting
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 44,
step 5).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 48,
step 4).
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] If you delete a recorded title (or a still picture),
the space deleted becomes available for recording.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)
View” (➡ 48, step 4).
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles or still
pictures
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Available
disc space
......
Last title
recorded
Title
Title
Multiple deleting
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
4 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press
[OK].
Available disc space does
Available disc space
not increase even after
increases after deleting
The title, album or the picture is deleted.
deleting
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
......
Title
Title
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Deleting titles or pictures during play
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
1
While playing
Press [DELETE ¢].
You cannot delete a picture during a Slide Show.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The title or the picture is deleted.
RQT8859
50
Copying titles or playlists
Copy
Advanced Copy
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult Make a copy list and then copy.
Features
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
settings.
way you want.
HDD ➝ DVD
≤
≤
≤
Copy direction
DVD ➝ HDD
–
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)
s
t
≤
s
i
l
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with
finalised discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from
+RW to HDD.
y
High speed mode copy§1
≤
pla
or
§2
Changing recording mode
Finalise§3
–
≤
s
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalised
Can be selected
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
ngitle
Copying SD Video from an SD Card
≤
y
–
–
–
(➡ 55)
[HDD] [RAM] only
Copying playlists§4
–
≤
≤
–
–
≤
≤
Cop
/
§5
§5
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
≤
–
–
–
–
tor
§6
§7
§6
≤
ga
§8
–
–
i
≤
v
§1 To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD
(The default setting is “On”. ➡ 65).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
≥When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with
high-speed copy.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments.
≥SD Video titles copied to the HDD from an SD Card.
Na
te
le
De
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed
)
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
➡
62).
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD Card.)
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 8).
–Still pictures cannot be played.
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
12X Speed
DVD-R§1
4X Speed
4X Speed
8X Speed
+R§4
4X Speed
+R DL§2
4X Speed
+RW
HDD
DVD-R DL§2
DVD-RW§3
Recording
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Recorded
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Mode
XP
time
12 min.
6 min.
3 min.
2 min.
time
time
time
time
time
time
5
x
5 min. 46 s. 10
2 min. 30 s. 24
1 min. 21 s. 44
58 sec. 62
48 sec. 75
x
x
x
x
x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
4
8
x
x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
4
8
x
x
8 min. 20 s.
7
x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
4
8
x
x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
4
8
x
x
1
SP
LP
EP (6H)
EP (8H)
10
20
30
x
x
x
x
3 min. 45 s. 16
1 min. 53 s. 32
x
x
1 hour
3 min. 45 s. 16
2 min. 30 s. 24
1 min. 53 s. 32
x
x
x
3 min. 45 s. 16
2 min. 30 s. 24
1 min. 57 s. 31
x
x
x
3 min. 45 s. 16
x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
1 min. 30 s. 40
≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at
normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and
+R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 84) compatible DVD-
RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 45).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”
titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered
on the same copying list.
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 5)
RQT8859
51
Copying titles or playlists
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
DVD
TV
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
Í
Í
VOL
CH
press [OK].
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
COPY Navigator
HDD
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size: 0MB( 0%)
Total
:
0
PAGE
CH
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
001
2 3
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
1
002
003
004
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
Numbered
buttons
4 5 6
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
Page 01/01
INPUT
0
SELECT
OK
Select
OPTION
RETURN
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
;
1
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
∫
want to copy and press [OK].
STATUS
STATUS
I
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
3,4,2,1
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register.
OK
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
“Green”
OPTION
“Red”
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
4
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-
only and you can no longer record or edit.
Before copying
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 66) when:
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Copy starts.
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 66)
and you are copying in XP mode.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
∫ To stop copying (➡ 54)
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed
[HDD]
>
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following table.
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 65)
Copy speed
functions (➡ 54)
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §
High speed
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
Navigator
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
Normal speed
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
[OPTION].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size: 0MB( 0%)
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
Total
:
0
§ In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
Page 01/01
Properties
Sort
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” do not match.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [OK].
Properties:
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown.
[Note]
Sort:
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL
or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot
be copied.
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 4, 5).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
Copy
[Note]
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 65).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 53).
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalised (➡ 84). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,
copy will not be performed.)
RQT8859
52
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.
Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Copy
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
( 0%)
0MB
Size:
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
1
2
3
Copy Direction
HDD ꢀꢁDVD
No. Size
s
t
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
s
i
l
Create List
y
See also “Before copying” (➡ 52).
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
pla
OK
OPTION
RETURN
1
While stopped
or
s
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Create List
HDD
ngitle
VIDEO Playlists
y
and press [OK].
- - -
007
008
0:30(XP)
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
Cop
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
- - -
Copy” and press [OK].
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
Previous
Copy
OK
Select
OPTION
Next
RETURN
Cancel All
Source
HDD
DVD
1 Copy Direction
HDD ꢀꢁDVD
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and
press [OK].
Destination
Copy Mode
2
VIDEO High Speed
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
0
Create List
3
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “
” can be registered.
” or
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
“
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
be registered.
” can
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK]
(➡ below, Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ below)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 54)
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
You can register a multiple number of titles and
playlists on the copying list by repeating
steps 2–4.
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
(➡ 54) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not
sufficient).
5 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK]
.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press
[OK]
Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK]
.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 65).
.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or
“Copy Only” and press [OK].
≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is cancelled.
RQT8859
(continued on the next page)
53
Copying titles or playlists
(Continued)
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after
copy.
Refer to the control reference on page 52.
∫ To stop copying
∫ To edit the copying list
Delete All
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
Select the item in step 6–4 (➡ 53, right column)
Add
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
Delete
Move
[OK].
Delete All:
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only
recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the
point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled
before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the
point canceled are copied.
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists and titles to be added and
press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ 53, Multiple editing).
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 53, left column)
∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)
≥Still pictures cannot be played.
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
[+R]DL]
is displayed, but copy cannot be
performed.
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 8, When recording the “One time only
recording” broadcasts)
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying.
(➡ 8, When recording the “One time only
recording” broadcasts)
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
Size:
0MB (0%)
No. Size
Name of item
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
New item (Total=0)
≥When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
≥The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
RQT8859
54
8
When the top menu is displayed
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
+R DL
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
My favorite
01/02
s
t
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
2
s
i
l
03
Chapter
04
Chapter
3
4
y
05
06
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 65) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 65) of the Setup menu.
pla
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
or
s
To return to the previous screen
ngitle
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
Press [RETURN].
y
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
Cop
≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalised disc (➡ 34).
[Note]
≥The screen saver on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
Video”) (➡ 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 53, Copying
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
6 Set “Copy Time”.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 7).
∫Setting the unit to copy according to the set
time
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying SD Video from an SD Card
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video on an SD Card with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
≥This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from an SD
Card.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
SD Video
1 Copy Direction
DVD ꢀꢁHDD
VIDEO§
2
Hour
00 Min.
Copy Mode
2
3
DVD-Video XP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Copy Time
HDD
Press OK to change the setting.
Start Copying
OK
DVD-RAM
RETURN
§ Conventionally recorded programmes
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD Card slot while stopped.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 53.
SD Card
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
SELECT
RETURN
OK
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
How to copy
Copying” and press [OK].
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (➡ 53)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (➡ 62).
Copy Direction:
Source : SD CARD
Copy Mode:
Format : VIDEO
≥SD Video on an SD Card are automatically registered on the
copy list.
≥If there are no SD Video on an SD Card, “Copy Video
(MPEG2)” is not displayed.
RQT8859
55
Copying still pictures
6 Register still pictures for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
DVD
TV
changes to it (➡ step 7).
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
list.
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
ANALOGUE
CH
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
8 9
7
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
2
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Create List
3
:, 9
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
;
OPTION
RETURN
STATUS
∫ To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[OK].
I
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
3,4,2,1
OK
OPTION
OPTION
RETURN
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK] (➡ 57,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 57)
≥To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 57)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 57)
RETURN
CREATE
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (➡ 7).
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be
used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only
compatible with SD Memory Cards.
You can register a multiple number of still pictures on
the copying list by repeating steps 2–3.
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to CD-R/CD-RW.
[SD]
4 Press [2] to confirm.
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below) is
automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)”, press [OK] and then
go to step 4 on page 57, “Copying all the still pictures on a card—
Copy All Pictures”.
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].
SD Card
Copy
Album View
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
SD CARD > HDD
New item (Total=0)
Copy Mode
SELECT
RETURN
OK
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.
Copying using the copying list
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK] (➡ 57,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 57)
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 57)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 57)
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
You can register a multiple number of folders on the
copying list by repeating steps 4–5.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Cancel All
Source
SD CARD
HDD
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD > HDD
Copying” and press [OK].
≥For individual still pictures only
Destination
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
2
0
Create List
3
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
Folder
New folder
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
4 Set the copy direction.
---
New folder
---
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press
[1].
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
To return to the previous screen
5 Set the recording mode.
Press [RETURN].
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
RQT8859
Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK]
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
.
56
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
Copying all the still pictures on a card—
Copy All Pictures
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
[SD] > [HDD] or [RAM]
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register to the list.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.
s
e
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
1
While stopped
ur
t
∫ To edit the copying list
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Select the item in step 6–3 (for a still picture) or 6–5
Delete All
lpic
i
t
(for a folder) (➡ 56, right column)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Add
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
and press [OK].
Delete
ings
[OK].
y
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All
Pictures” and press [OK].
Copy All Pictures
Delete All:
Cop
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Copy from
SD CARD
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added
and press [OK].
Copy to
HDD
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ above, Multiple editing).
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
∫ To select another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
If you want to switch to another higher folder (➡ below).
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
Create List
SD CARD
Create List
SD CARD
Picture (JPEG)
Folder
Folder
103__DVD
\DCIM\100__DVD
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
---
---
---
---
----
----
Page 01/01
Picture 0012 File 0012
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
OK
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
15:
115:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[Note]
≥When copying the still pictures on a folder by folder basis
(➡ 56) or card by card basis (➡ above, Copy All Pictures), files
other than the still picture files inside the folder will also be
copied. (This does not apply to the lower folders contained
inside the folders.)
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing
still pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 37), copying
will stop partway through.
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, the
folder’s name may be changed from the source folder. It is
recommended that you input a folder name before copying
(➡ 49, Enter Album Name).
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
\DCIM\100__DVD
folders recognizable, while the screen on
the right appears
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
1 Press [OPTION] and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select the higher
Select Folder
folder and press [OK].
You cannot register a folder with a
different higher folder to the same
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
Press OK to set.
SELECT
list.
RETURN
OK
3 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
folder and press [OK].
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
RQT8859
57
Copying from a video cassette recorder
Í
Í
2 Start play on the other equipment.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
3
When you want to start recording
2 3
1
Press [¥ REC].
4 5 6
Recording starts.
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
0
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
SELECT
INPUT SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
To stop recording
Press [∫].
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
∫
;
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
STATUS
I
FUNCTION
MENU
≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 27), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
OK
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
REC MODE
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
¥ REC
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
Preparation
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left column).
Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
Pause play of the DV equipment at the point you want recording
to start.
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
2
3
4
This unit
DV IN
VIDEO
L/MONO - AUDIO- R
S VIDEO
AV3 IN
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
Yellow White Red
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 72).
After preparation is completed, the following screen appears.
DV Auto Rec
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to
HDD” or “Rec to DVD” and press
[OK].
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
S Video
cable§
Audio/Video
cable
Other video equipment
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
Cancel
You can proceed to step 4.
SELECT
RETURN
OK
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
≥When the screen is not displayed, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
§ The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
HDD or DVD and then continue from step 1.
1
While stopped
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 65) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 65) of the Setup menu.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec”
and press [OK].
About the aspect when recording a programme (➡ 8)
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and
[Note]
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.
press [OK].
Recording starts.
Manual recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic
recording.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 8, Selecting Audio for
Recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 72).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
[Note]
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “AV-in
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 43).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left column).
RQT8859
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select “A3”.
58
Entering text
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
character and press [OK].
Numbered
buttons
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
ANALOGUE
CH
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
DELETE
¢
∫
t
x
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
;
e.g., entering the letter “R”
ingte
r
e
STATUS
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th
5
J
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
I
row.
7
7
/Ent
2 Press [7] twice to highlight
“R”.
3 Press [OK].
6 M
r
e
7
OK
d
r
P
T
7
o
c
e
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
≥To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢] and press
[OK].
OK
8
RETURN
CREATE
r
e
t
t
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
e
s
s
a
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
[HDD] [RAM]
3 Press [∫] (Set).
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
Characters
64 (44§)
oc
Title
de
i
v
Playlist
64
To end partway
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.
Album of still pictures
36
oma
Disc ([RAM])
64
r
f
§ Title name for timer recording
ing
y
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
For your reference
Title
Disc
44
40
Cop
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation (➡ 62). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
[SD]
Characters
36
Album of still pictures
Enter Name
Chapter 1_
_
Broadcast
Characters
14
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
i
/
9
j
l
$
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
Favourite group 1-4
*
%
[Note]
i
fl
&
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1 Show Enter Name screen.
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 31.
Title
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 44.
Playlist
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 47.
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 60.
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 on page 48, “To edit
the album”.
Favourite group 1-4
Press the “Red” button in step 2 right column on page 69,
“To change the name of a group in the “Favourite” column”.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Enter Name
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
ꢀ
/
9
ꢁ
ꢂ
$
0
Top Menu Preview
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
7
ꢃ
[
&
@
_
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
ꢄ
]
Delete
m
n
o
M
P
T
ꢅ
Set
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
ꢁꢁ
0
9
^
`
SELECT
Space
RETURN
OK
RQT8859
59
HDD, disc and card management
Setting the protection
[RAM]
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
Preparation
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4 5 6
ANALOGUE
CH
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
Protection” and press [OK].
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
press [OK].
STATUS
DVD
EXIT
I
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Management
DVD-RAM
Disc Name
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
On
OPTION
RETURN
3,4,2,1
SELECT
RETURN
OK
CREATE
OK
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
Format Disc
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
RETURN
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
≥You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB (➡ 7).
Cartridge-protection
Common procedures
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
1
While stopped
play automatically starts when inserted in the
unit.
PROTECT
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[SD]
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK”
position.
and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Timer Recording
G-Code Record
Playback
Recording
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Delete
Copy
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Providing a name for a disc
To Others
OK
Setup
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
RETURN
HDD Management
You can provide a name for each disc.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above).
Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
DVD
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Management
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
DVD-RAM
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Off
(➡ 59, Entering text)
SELECT
OK
Format Disc
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment.
RETURN
≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
≥When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is
displayed.
Documentary
My favorite
01/02
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
2
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT8859
60
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
Deleting all the contents of a disc or
card—Format
[HDD] [RAM]
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 60).
Preparation
nt
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 60).
me
e
g
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
[Note]
na
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
ma
titles” and press [OK].
d
r
a
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
ndc
press [OK].
a
c
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
,dis
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,
A message appears when finished.
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
press [OK].
HD
7 Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
[Note]
press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
7 Press [OK].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed on the disc.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT8859
61
HDD, disc and card management
Refer to the control reference on page 60.
[Note]
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
Selecting the background style
—Top
Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
After finalising
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-
Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 61) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-
minute)§ chapters, if
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
Top Menu List
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.
1
2
3
Display after finalising
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
01
Before
finalising
After
finalising
Title Name
Recording/Editing/Entering name
Play on other players
≤
–
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 45,
Change Thumbnail)
–
≤
≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first—Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
[+RW]
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
“Title 1” and press [OK].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left
column) before creating top menu.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalising the disc.
Menu” and press [OK].
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
7 Press [OK].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
[Note]
press [OK].
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
A message appears when finalising is finished.
[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
7 Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT8859
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
62
FUNCTION MENU window
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
DVD
TV
1
While stopped
Í
Í
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
PAGE
CH
k
2 3
1
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 70:00 SP
4 5 6
Playback
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
Recording
G-Code
DELETE
Delete
Copy
INPUT
/ChildLoc
0
SELECT
SKIP
w
o
d
SLOW/SEARCH
To Others
OK
RETURN
n
i
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
w
STATUS
I
NU
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
E
FUNCTION
MENU
press [OK].
OK
≥If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following screen
appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [OK].
≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
screen.
OPTION
RETURN
3,4,2,1
RETURN
OK
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
ment/FUCTIONM
dmnage
car
d
n
sca
di
,
Child Lock
D
HD
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN]
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
4 5 6
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”
disappears.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
I
OK
OK
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
RQT8859
63
Changing the unit’s settings
Common procedures
W
X
CH
1
While stopped
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
∫
and press [OK].
< OPEN/CLOSE
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
DVD
press [OK].
TV
Í
Í
VOL
CH
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
press [1].
2 3
4 5 6
1
Menus
Options
Tabs
W X
CH
Numbered
buttons
Setup
ANALOGUE
CH
Comb Filter
Still Mode
Seamless Play
On
Automatic
On
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
Tuning
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
TAB
SELECT
OK
STATUS
RETURN
EXIT
I
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
press [OK].
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and
OK
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
press [OK].
“Red”
“Green”
“Blue”
“Yellow”
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Summary of settings
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Edit Favourites (➡ 69)
You can edit terrestrial digital or analogue channels into different
four categories.
Tuning
Auto-Setup Restart (➡ 72)
You can restart the channel settings for terrestrial digital and
analogue channels.
Settings for Digital Services
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
DVB Manual Tuning (➡ 70)
Add New DVB Services (➡ 69)
Signal Condition (➡ 70)
You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could
not complete successfully.
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to
receive.
You can check the condition of digital broadcast signals.
You can delete channels and set analogue channel details.
Settings for Analogue Services
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Manual Tuning (➡ 71)
RQT8859
64
Tabs
Disc
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Settings for Playback
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Ratings
≥8 No Limit: All DVD-Video can be played.
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
≥1 to 7:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password
with the numbered buttons when the password screen is
shown.
≥0 Lock All: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
tings
e
≥Unlock Recorder
≥Change Password
≥Temporary Unlock
s
s
≥Change Level
≥Do not forget your password.
Soundtrack Choose the language for audio, subtitle and
≥English
≥German
≥French ≥Italian
unit’
disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥Spanish
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite ≥Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.
any changes you make here.
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥Enter a code (➡ 73) with the numbered
buttons when you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.
When the selected language is not available
on the disc, the default language is played.
There are discs where you can only switch the
language from the menu screen (➡ 35).
Subtitle
Menus
≥Automatic: If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
ingthe
n
automatically appear if available on that disc.
≥English
≥German
≥French
≥Italian
Cha
≥Spanish
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥English
≥German
≥French
≥Italian
≥Spanish
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
Settings for Recording
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
≥EP (6 Hours):You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP
mode (➡ 25, Recording modes and approximate recording
times).
disc.
≥EP (8 Hours):You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when
using “EP (8 Hours)”.
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.
≥When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with
≥Automatic: The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including when
recording started at a commercial, etc.).
“Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be ≥16:9
recorded in the original aspect ratio.
≥4:3
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Rec for High Speed Copy
≥On: You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press [2, 1] to
select “Yes” and press [OK].
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW using high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is
restricted (➡ right).
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded titles.
–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set in
“Aspect for Recording” (➡ above).
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is effective when recording from a television
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment),
or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Bilingual
Audio Selection” (➡ 66).
≥You are no longer able to switch the audio when watching
a programme on an input channel on the TV connected to
this unit.
≥Off (➡ 26)
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
≥Maximum
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-
≥Normal (Silent):
speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise generated by this
4X discs).
unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for
copying will double (approximately).
(continued on the next page)
RQT8859
65
Changing the unit’s settings
(continued)
Refer to the control reference on page 64.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Comb Filter
≥On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.
≥Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Picture
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➡ 72).
Still Mode
≥Automatic
≥Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
(The picture is coarser.)
≥Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is
clearer and finer.)
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play
(➡ 84, Frames and fields).
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥On: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (Play x1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
≥Off: The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
≥On
≥Off
Sound
Bilingual Audio Selection
(Analogue broadcast only)
≥M 1
≥M 2
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type
when:
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ below, “Audio Mode audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ below).
for XP Recording”).
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 16).
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96
kHz or 88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency of
over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.
≥On: Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process signals
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
≥Off: Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose when
the connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
Dolby Digital
Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes
the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
≥Bitstream:When connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
DTS
≥Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS
logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the DTS
[Note]
Not making the proper settings may
result in noise or some trouble for
digital recording.
logo.
MPEG
≥Bitstream: When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
≥PCM: When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG
decoder.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
≥Dolby Digital (➡ 84)
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP
mode.
≥LPCM (➡ 85)
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than
that of normal XP mode recordings.
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
–When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of
audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
Audio Mode for DV Input
≥Stereo 1: Records audio (L1, R1).
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s ≥Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
DV input terminal (➡ 58).
subsequent to original recording.
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
≥Mix:
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
RQT8859
66
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (➡ 23) disappears automatically.
≥Off: The digital channel information is not displayed.
Display
≥3 sec.
≥5 sec.
≥7 sec.
≥10 sec.
The length of time the control panel (➡ 19) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
Grey Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.
≥On
≥Off
tings
FL Display
≥Bright
≥Dim
e
≥Automatic: The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily
if a button is pressed. While using this mode, the
standby power consumption can be reduced.
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 68) to “On”.
s
s
unit’
New Service Message (➡ 23)
≥Automatic
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel
settings and all created categories are deleted. The timer
recording programmes are also cancelled.).
≥Off: The service messages are not shown.
ingthe
n
TV Aspect (➡ 20)
Set to match the type of ≥16:9: When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
Cha
Connection
≥Pan & Scan:
television connected.
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side
picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (➡ 85).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style (➡ 85).
Progressive (➡ 21)
≥On
≥Off
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set
“AV1 Output” to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without
component)”.
TV System (➡ 72)
≥PAL
≥NTSC
HDMI Settings§
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Format
≥576i/480i
≥720p
≥1080p:
≥576p/480p
≥1080i
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be
changed. However if you are concerned about output picture
quality, it may be improved by changing the setting.
When setting video output to “1080p”, we
recommend using a Panasonic HDMI cable 5
meters or less in length to prevent video distortion.
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p,
you need to connect the unit to 1080p compatible
HDTV.
≥Automatic: Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).
Aspect for 4:3 Video
≥4:3:
Picture output expands left or right.
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set
how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.
≥16:9: Picture is output as original aspect with
side panels.
Digital Audio Output
≥HDMI and Optical
≥Optical Only: Select when this unit is connected to an amplifier
with an optical digital audio cable and connected
to a TV with an HDMI cable and you want to enjoy
the highest quality of audio from discs (➡ 16).
VIERA Link
≥On
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
≥Off: Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
AV1 Output
≥Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite
signal.
Selects the output from the AV1 terminal.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”
for component output (progressive output).
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
≥S Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.
≥RGB 1 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically
switch to display the picture from the unit when the unit is
turned on.
≥If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.
≥RGB 2 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit
only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
AV2 Input
≥Video
≥S Video
This setting is according to the output signal of the connected
equipment.
§
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be able to
RQT8859
change the settings.
(continued on the next page)
67
Changing the unit’s settings
(continued)
Refer to the control reference on page 64.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Remote Control (➡ 22)
Clock (➡ 73)
≥DVD 1
≥DVD 2
≥DVD 3
Others
Power Save
≥On: Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 67).
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
standby (➡ 86).
≥Off
≥If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.
Quick Start
≥On
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start
recording as quick as approx. 1 second§ after turning it on. You
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record
something.
≥Off:
Standby power consumption is less than when this is set
to “On”.
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to
“Off”.
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than
DVD-RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
DivX Registration
≥You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 39).
System Update
≥Update data and EPG download information is sent by an
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these
updates, you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update
is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You
cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing
the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may damage
the unit.
In order to update this unit’s software, the EPG download, and to
support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit
periodically performs software updates.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥An EPG download will take approximately 60 minutes. While
the EPG download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the
unit’s display. The EPG download can be interrupted by
switching on the unit, since the download will continue in the
background.
EPG Download in Standby
Software Update in Standby
≥On: When you set this unit to standby mode, EPG data is
downloaded automatically.
≥Off
≥On: When you set this unit to standby mode, software updates
are downloaded automatically.
≥Off
EPG/Software search period
≥Automatic:
The unit will give priority to searching for EPG
download and update data at midnight.
Selects the time to automatically perform EPG download and
updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only
be set when “EPG Download in Standby” and “Software
Update in Standby” is set to “On”.
≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.
≥02:00–06:00
≥06:00–10:00
≥10:00–14:00
≥14:00–18:00
≥18:00–22:00
≥22:00–02:00
Software Update Search Now
Start the search for new software manually.
≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
A new software version is announced by a message. Do not
turn your unit off during the update. This could result in the
loss of data. A message shows that the update has finished.
If a new software version is not going to be broadcast for the
next few days, a corresponding message also appears.
Initialize
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
≥Yes
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password ≥No
and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer
recording programmes are also cancelled.
Default Settings
≥Yes
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, ≥No
time zone settings, disc language settings, ratings level,
ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory
presets.
RQT8859
68
∫ To delete channels on a group
Tuning
After performing steps 1–6
§
1Press [1] .
1
While stopped
2Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
“Favourite” column and press the “Yellow”
button.
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
group.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
tings
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
e
3Press [OK] to save the group.
Deleting a channel from a group does not affect the channel
itself. You can still select the channel from the “All Services”
group.
s
s
press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Tuning” and
unit’
press [1].
∫ To change the name of a group in the
“Favourite” column
Setup
Edit Favourites
After performing steps 1–6
Auto-Setup Restart
ingthe
Settings for Digital Services
§
n
1Press [1] .
Tuning
Settings for Analogue Services
Disc
2Press the “Red” button.
Picture
Sound
Cha
(➡ 59, Entering text)
Display
Connection
Others
TAB
§ When the station name of the “All Services” column is highlighted
SELECT
RETURN
OK
To browse through the list
Press [W X CH].
Edit Favourites
You can create four groups of channels for making viewing and
recording easier. Editing these groups does not affect the channel
setting itself.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the groups
during timer recording standby.
Add New DVB Services
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to
receive.
After performing steps 1–4
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit
Favourites” and press [OK].
After performing steps 1–4
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for
Digital Services” and press [OK].
6 Press the “Green” button to select the
group.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Add New DVB
Edit Favourites
Services” and press [OK].
All Services
2A ABC
Favourites 1
The unit starts searching for newly available terrestrial digital
channels. This takes about 5 minutes.
20A ABC HDTV
Add New DVB Services
Please wait!
Ch 6
69
Prog. Channel
Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
Favourite Select
Add
Add All
SELECT
Page +
Page -
RETURN
∫ To add channels to a group
After performing steps 1–6
RETURN: to cancel
1Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All
Services” column and press the “Yellow”
RETURN
A message is displayed when the search is finished.
“No new services found.” is displayed when no new services
can be found.
button.
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the
group. (Only when no channels have been added to the group.)
7 Press [OK] to save the newly found
channels.
2Press [OK] to save the group.
∫ To change the order of channels of a group
After performing steps 1–6
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
§
1Press [1] .
2Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the
“Favourite” column to move and press the
“Green” button.
The channels found before stopping are not saved.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
3Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the
channel and press the “Green” button.
≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.
4Press [OK] to save the group.
RQT8859
69
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 64.
Signal Condition
DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not
complete successfully.
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 69)
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
2 Press [W X CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the
unit’s display.
3 Display the Setup menu again (➡ 69).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for
Digital Services” and press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Manual
Tuning” and press [OK].
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 69)
DVB Manual Tuning
Channel System
Frequency
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
Australia
DVB CH24
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for
Digital Services” and press [OK].
498,0 MHz
10
10
0
0
Prog. Channel Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Signal
Condition” and press [OK].
START SCAN
OFFSET
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
CHANNEL
RETURN
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
7 Press [3, 4] to select the channel
2 ABC 2W DVB CH30
Signal Quality
0
0
10
10
Signal Strength
you want to set.
CH +
CH –
RETURN
8 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.
Signal Quality
≥The frequency rises and falls in steps of 0.5 MHz.
≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and
signal quality displays.
Below 2 (display red): The signal quality is so poor that there may
be interference in the pictures and sound.
2–5 (display orange): The signal quality is basically adequate, but
brief interference in the pictures and sound
[Refer to “Signal Condition” (➡ left) for signal quality and
signal strength.]
is possible in isolated case.
Over 5 (display green): Optimum picture and sound quality.
9 Press [OK] to start scan.
10TPhreessetsch[aEnnXelIiTs ]disapnlaydedpinrethse stab[leW. X CH] to
Signal Strength
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
≥When the signal is weak:
check that applicable channels have
been selected.
–adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
–adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup
menu (➡ right).
–check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT8859
70
Analogue Manual Tuning
You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel
details.
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 69)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for
Analogue Services” and press [OK].
tings
6 While “Manual Tuning” is highlighted,
e
s
s
and press [OK].
Manual Tuning
Pos Name Ch
Pos Name Ch
unit’
1
2
ARD
ZDF
N3
4
2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3
4
5
5
8
10
HR3
BR3
6
7
8
9
SELECT
OK
ingthe
RETURN
n
10
Delete
Cha
To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
∫ To change the tuning settings for individual
programme position
Pos
Name
Channel
1
ARD
4
7 Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
Manual
Tuning
Fine Tuning Auto
Mono
to select a
Off
programme position
and press [OK].
SELECT
RETURN
RETURN : leave
Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
Pos
Programme position in the table
(You cannot change the programme position.)
Name
To enter or change the name of a TV station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and
press [OK].
If the station name needs a blank space, select
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.
Channel
To enter newly available TV stations or change
the channel number of an already tuned TV
station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter
the channel number of the desired TV station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station
has been tuned.
After the desired TV station is tuned, press [OK].
Fine Tuning
Mono
To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition
and press [OK].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is
distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if
you want to record the normal (mono) sound
during a stereo or bilingual broadcast, and press
[OK].
RQT8859
71
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 64.
Auto-Setup Restart
TV System
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with,
or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the
HDD.
You can restart auto channel setting for terrestrial digital and
analogue channels if set up (➡ 20) fails for some reason.
However, if you perform “Auto-Setup Restart”, the order of analogue
channels will change.
1
While stopped
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 69)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Setup
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Restart” and press [OK].
and press [OK].
The confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped,
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
Auto-Setup screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
and press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV System”
and press [OK].
TV System
Setup
PAL
NTSC
Tuning
Disc
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Picture
Sound
Display
SELECT
OK
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Connection
Others
RETURN
6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV system
List of TV Reception Channels
and press [OK].
≥PAL (factory preset)
Tuner
Channel
VHF
0–12
6–12
UHF
CATV
–Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL
60.
–Select to record television programmes and PAL input from
other equipment.
System
Coverage
Australia
Analogue
45 MHz to
470 MHz
PAL–B
DVB–T
28–69
27–69
Australia
Digital
–[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
–
≥NTSC
–Select when connecting to a NTSC television. Television
programmes cannot be recorded properly.
–Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on
the HDD.
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
∫ To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit simultaneously for 5 or more seconds.
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be
used.
RQT8859
72
Clock Settings
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a day. However, if the
time is not set correctly use the settings listed in the method below.
In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in memory for approximately 60 minutes.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
tings
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Clock” and press [OK].
e
s
s
unit’
e.g., This screen appears
while receiving a digital
broadcast.
Clock
ingthe
Automatic
Off
Time Zone
Queensland
Date
n
Time
Cha
15
:
45
:
39
11
.
12
.
2007
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
CHANGE
OK
SELECT
RETURN
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].
7 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)
8 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
9 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
∫ To change the time zone
1
2
Press [3, 4] to set “Automatic” to “On” and press [OK] in step 6.
Press [3, 4] to select the correct time zone and press [OK].
Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed.
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.
3
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
Basque:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
RQT8859
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
73
Messages
On the television
Page
Authorisation Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
38, 39
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.
—
—
25
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of program has been exceeded.
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
72
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
Cannot record to the disc.
Unable to format.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
10
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.
37
13
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
45, 50,
61
Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.
≥Use a new disc.
—
—
No Disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.
7, 37
13
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The format of the card inserted is incomplete.
7
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
45, 49,
50, 61
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
54, 57
4–5
This is a non-recordable disc.
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised DVD-
R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management in
FUNCTION MENU.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.
61
—
Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 500.
50
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unnecessary titles.
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)
39
—
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
$
RQT8859
74
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
Page
22
DVD
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
(“∑” stands for a number.)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
s
e
HARD ERR§
GUIDE
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
—
68
—
sag
≥TV Guide data is being downloaded.
Me
NoERAS
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
10
10
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
—
PLEASE WAIT§
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken.
Wait until the message disappears.
PROG FULL§
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
33
—
SP 35:50
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
LP 151h
“SP”, “LP” and the numbers
are examples.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP
151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151
hours”.
SW-DL
≥The unit is performing a software update.
68
61
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORT§
F74
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
4–6
—
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
F75
U59
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
—
—
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear
of the unit.
U61
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display disappears you can use the unit again.
—
—
U72
U73
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–The HDMI cable is too long. Please use a cable 5.0 meters or less.
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
U76
≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright
protection.
—
—
U80
U81
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now
press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
U88
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display disappears you can use the unit again.
78
H or F
≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
—
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
78–83
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
X HOLD
≥The Child Lock function is activated.
63
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.
RQT8859
§The message are alternately displayed.
75
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
Page
—
Which aerial is suitable for receiving
digital terrestrial broadcasts?
≥You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the area where you live, a new
aerial may be necessary. Consult your local TV aerial installer. For more information
Can this unit receive or record High
Definition (HD) broadcasts?
≥No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts.
—
What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?
≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must 16, 17
connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.
Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.
16, 17
The television has both S VIDEO IN
terminal and COMPONENT VIDEO IN
terminals. Which terminal should I
connect with?
≥Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a more vivid picture
compared to connecting with the S Video out terminal.
16
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some
flickering can occur.
Is my television progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input terminals
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
—
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs
bought in another country?
≥You cannot play DVD-Video if its region number does not include “4” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Cover
—
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to
a standard.
Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.
≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).
≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.
4–6
—
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW ≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
6, 37
—
compatibility with this unit.
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording
is usually not possible.
—
—
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- ≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalising the disc on
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
recorded on this unit be played on other
equipment?
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
—
—
Can I record digital audio signals using
this unit?
≥You cannot record digital signals from other equipment. The digital audio terminals on this
unit are for output only. (The audio recorded using the unit’s DV input terminal from a
digital video camcorder, for example, is recorded digitally.)
Can a digital audio signal from this unit
be recorded to other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.
–PCM Down Conversion: On
66
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
—
(Analogue broadcast only)
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast
during recording?
≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)
≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.
36
66
51
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
≥Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before recording the
programme.)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
RQT8859
76
TV Guide
Page
31
Is it possible to programme a recording, ≥You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording
with a start and end time that are
different from the TV Guide system?
menu.
Can I receive TV Guide system data via ≥No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite receivers or Set
31
—
a connected satellite receiver or a Set
Top Box?
Top Boxes, please use your unit’s manual timer programming.
What happens when I unplug my unit
from the household mains socket?
≥The TV Guide system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected from the
household mains socket for a longer period of time, then the TV Guide data is lost. Make
sure that the time is set correctly again.
tions
s
e
dqu
e
k
s
a
y
ntl
que
e
Fr
RQT8859
77
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic terrestrial broadcasting
breaks.
≥A sound is heard when the HDD goes into energy save mode, or
operations are slow to respond in energy save mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the energy save
mode (➡ 9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an
unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
Power
Page
No power.
≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.
14, 15
The unit does not turn on
pressing [Í DVD].
The unit switches to standby
mode.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.
—
The power is turned off
automatically.
≥If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI cable, this unit
will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.
18
Displays
The display is dim.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
67
73
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
≥Set the clock.
The time recorded on the disc
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
—
—
and the available time shown do ≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
not add up. last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
The displayed time of this unit is ≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
different from the actual increase in disc space.
recording time or MP3 recording ≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
—
—
time.
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
—
—
Compared to the actual recorded ≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
—
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
TV screen and video
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.
It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
—
The digital channel information
or control panel does not appear.
≥Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that the “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu will
be displayed.
67
≥The digital channel information will not appear during playback or recording.
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel information.
≥The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with “HDAVI Control 2” function.
—
—
19
The grey background does not
appear.
≥Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.
67
—
43
Picture does not appear during
timer recording.
≥Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer
recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
67
67
65
Screen size is wrong.
≥If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu.
≥By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.
≥Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “4:3”.
65
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
RQT8859
78
TV screen and video (continued)
Page
—
Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect
are stretched vertically.
≥16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or
longer)” recording mode.
–If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
—
–If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed
Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”.
65
–By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
65
There is a lot of after-image
when playing video.
≥Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
43
43
hotnguide
s
le
When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method
or material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
oub
r
T
There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
—
The images from this unit do not ≥Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal,
14–17
appear on the television.
S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on
this unit.
Picture is distorted.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5
seconds to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While
stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
—
—
72
≥When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV
system.
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
—
—
The picture is distorted during
play, or video will not play
correctly.
≥You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavorable weather
conditions.
≥The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in
the following situations:
—
—
–between titles recorded with different recording modes.
–between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
–between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
–between playlist chapters.
Sound
No sound.
Low volume.
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
amplifier if you have connected one.
14–17,
66
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.
36
43
≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
—
—
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT
terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to
“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected
with an HDMI cable.
≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.
—
67
—
65
Cannot switch audio.
≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
—
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”.)
66
65
≥The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch 16, 17,
the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using
audio cables.
66
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
—
RQT8859
79
Troubleshooting guide
Operation
Page
21
Cannot operate the television.
≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
The remote control doesn’t work.
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
22
control.
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time
for more than 5 seconds.
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
11
—
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
—
—
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.
21–22
21
63
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
24, 34
—
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
—
—
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the
dealer.
2
HDD activation is slow.
Cannot eject disc.
≥The HDD is in energy save mode.
9
≥The unit is recording.
—
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main
unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.
63
Cannot tune channels.
Startup is slow.
≥Check the connections.
14–15
≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
68
—
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
RQT8859
80
Recording, timer recording and copying
Page
4, 5
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD
Management.
61
60
≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
84
45, 50,
61
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
—
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the
HDD and then copy.
45, 50,
61
hotnguide
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
s
le
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 500.
≥You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
oub
r
T
—
—
—
—
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings.
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded
with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
Digital broadcasts cannot be
recorded or copied.
≥Some digital broadcasts are copyright protected with “One time only recording”. This type of
programme can only be recorded or copied to the HDD or a CPRM compatible DVD-RAM.
—
Cannot record from external
equipment.
≥Check that the connection is correct.
≥Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.
15, 58
—
Timer recording does not work
properly.
≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the
programme.
33
≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording
33
list is not on.)
≥Set the clock.
73
32
Timer recording does not stop
even when [∫] is pressed.
≥Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive.
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
—
The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.
≥The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
31
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.
≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
≥You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.
—
61
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
disc using the high speed mode.
≥When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu. (The
default setting is “On”.)
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot
perform high-speed copy.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD Recorders with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.
65
—
—
When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.
≥Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.
—
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.
—
—
An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVD-R,
etc.
≥When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.
—
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
58
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
—
—
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.
—
58
RQT8859
81
Troubleshooting guide
Play
Page
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
34
10
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
4–6
—
—
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
65
—
39
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
—
—
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
—
5
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
DVD-Video is not played.
≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
≥Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.
65
Cover
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.
—
35
No subtitles.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.
—
42
Angle cannot be changed.
≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.
—
—
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.
≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE
SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main
unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
Quick View does not work.
≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
—
—
The resume play function does
not work.
≥Memorized positions are cancelled when
–press [∫] several times.
–open the disc tray (excluding [HDD]).
–[SD] [CD] [VCD] turn off the power.
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.
—
The Video CD picture does not
display properly.
≥When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.
72
—
≥
When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during search.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does ≥These functions do not work with finalised discs.
—
72
≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title
not work.
recorded on the disc.
It takes time before play starts.
Picture stops.
≥This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
—
—
—
Cannot see the beginning of the ≥(If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the
beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the
beginning of the title.
title played.
Edit
Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.
≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
50
—
Cannot edit.
≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
50
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
10
4–6
Cannot create chapters.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a
start point.
—
Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.
—
—
Cannot delete chapters.
Cannot create a playlist.
≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
45
—
≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select
them individually.
Still pictures
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
—
60
Cannot edit or format a card.
≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)
The contents of the card cannot
be read.
≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT 12 and
FAT 16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT 32 format.
7, 37
≥
The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this unit.
7
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥You can use SD Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 4 GB.
≥This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD Card.
—
—
—
RQT8859
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
—
61
≥
When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or card.
82
TV Guide
Page
The TV Guide System does not
receive any data.
≥Check whether the clock is properly set.
≥If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the TV Guide system may not be
able to receive any data.
73
—
“No Data” is displayed for some ≥Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.
—
—
30, 31
≥Analogue broadcasts are not supported by the TV Guide system.
or all stations.
≥Programme the Timer recording manually or via G-CODE.
The TV Guide information is not
displayed properly.
≥There was a programme change.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV Guide system provider or
station provider.
—
—
≥Programme information about analogue broadcasts is not displayed.
The TV Guide data transfer was
interrupted.
≥The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.
≥The programme information may be incomplete.
—
—
The TV Guide data is not
updated.
≥Make sure that the time is set correctly.
—
68
hotnguide
≥Check whether “Off” is set under “EPG Download in Standby” and change the setting in the
s
Setup menu.
le
Digital broadcast
Digital broadcasts cannot be
received.
oub
≥Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
—
—
r
T
≥The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station, or the direction of the aerial
may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV
After DVB Auto-Setup only some ≥Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
or no DVB channels are found.
—
≥Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
—
14, 15
Use the included RF coaxial cable shown in STEP 1, Connections “A” or “B”.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/installed by a licenced installer that
should comply with Australian Standard AS1417.1.
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/UHF aerial should be
adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception
performance.
≥If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master Antenna TV (MATV) system is
designed for analogue and DVB-T reception. Please consult your body corporate. For more
—
Picture regularly breaks up on
some channels, “No Signal”
message is displayed.
≥Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are displayed in red or
constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
≥Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
Use the included RF coaxial cable shown in STEP 1, Connections “A” or “B”.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/installed by a licenced installer that
should comply with Australian Standard AS1417.1.
≥Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such as light switches,
fridges etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad
shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse
noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
70
—
14, 15
—
≥When “No Signal” message is displayed, check aerial connection.
≥Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup menu.
—
70
Picture very infrequently breaks ≥Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lighting storms or heavy rain
up on some or all channels.
—
with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
≥Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance, or a passing
vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.
—
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
≥Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when
the power for the main unit is set to On.
—
≥Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
67
—
—
≥Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
≥If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a
power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”
may not work.
In this case, perform the following operations.
1
2
3
When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV
(VIERA) on again.
Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on
again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is
displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset
≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings
level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the tuning
settings, clock settings, time zone settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Auto-Setup screen appears. All
the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock settings return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
68
68
—
To reset the ratings level
settings
To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety devices
being activated
≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and
—
—
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
≥Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)
Other
RQT8859
After performing an update, you ≥Depending on the content of the update, some settings may have returned to the preset
—
can no longer receive
broadcasts.
values. Fix the settings again.
83
Glossary
Bitstream
Film and video
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames
per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames
per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs) or
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
DivX
Finalise
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD Card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place
where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD Cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD Card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of
data.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
u
r
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Frame
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
RQT8859
84
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
RGB
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs. LPCM sound is available when recording in XP mode.
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
y
r
sa
o
l
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
G
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels
you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time
(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,
etc.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality. You can play MP3 you have recorded onto CD-R and
CD-RW.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture fills
the screen.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
1080p
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and bottom
of the picture so the picture itself appears
in an aspect ratio of 16:9.
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
Playback control (PBC)
720p
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RQT8859
85
Specifications
Recording system
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
Television system
Tuner system
DVD-R : DVD-Video format§1
Channel coverage
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format§1
PAL-B
Australia
VHF: 0 to 12
UHF: 28 to 69
CATV: 45 MHz to 470 MHz
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format§1
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
DVB-T
Australia
RF converter output:
VHF: 6 to 12
UHF: 27 to 69
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
Not provided
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Card
DVD-R:
Slot:
Compatible media: SD Memory Card§2, SDHC Memory Card§3
,
DVD-R DL:
DVD-RW:
MultiMediaCard
Format:
FAT 12, FAT 16§4
(In case of SD Memory Card/MultiMediaCard)
FAT 32§4 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
+R:
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R DL:
+RW:
Still picture (JPEG)
Image file format:
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),
sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Recording time
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
Number of pixels:
Thawing time:
Between 34 a 34 and 6144 a 4096
Approx. 1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
[EX77]
Maximum Approx. 284 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
Video (SD Video)
XP: Approx. 36 hours, SP: Approx. 70 hours
Codec:
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
LP: Approx. 138 hours, EP: Approx. 212 hours/284 hours
[EX87]
Maximum Approx. 443 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 111 hours
LP: Approx. 222 hours, EP: Approx. 333 hours/443 hours
File Format:
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card
to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or
DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.
Playable discs
Others
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, DivX
Region code:
#4
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkDkH):
Mass:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format, DivX
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
[EX77] Approx. 35 W [EX87] Approx. 36 W
430 mmk329 mmk59 mm
Approx. 4.2 kg
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, JPEG, DivX)
Internal HDD capacity
[EX77] 160 GB
[EX87] 250 GB
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)
Optical pick-up
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
[EX77] Approx. 16 W (Quick Start mode)
[EX87] Approx. 17 W (Quick Start mode)
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
[Note]
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Wave length: (CD) 780 nm wave length, (DVD) 662 nm wave length
Laser power:
§1 It is compatible to a DVD-Video format after finalised.
§2 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
§3 Class is not supported.
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
Audio
§4 Long file name is unsupported.
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
Audio in:
≥Useable capacity will be less (SD Card).
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
Output level:
Output impedance:
Digital audio out:
Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS)
Video
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Recording system:
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
DV input
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
HDMI Output
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 2” function.
19 pin type A: 1 pc
RQT8859
86
Safety precautions
Placement
Foreign matter
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
s
n
Voltage
o
i
t
u
a
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Service
ec
r
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
p
y
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
et
AC mains lead protection
af
S
/
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
s
n
o
i
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
at
c
i
f
i
ec
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
p
S
Official DivX® Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6) with standard
playback of DivX® media files.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS
2.0iDigital Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd.
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
-If you see this symbol-
≥SDHC Logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact
your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct
method of disposal.
RQT8859
87
Index
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . 34, 40, 44, 48
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Display
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 23
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37–39, 84
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 66
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 43, 85
Properties
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protection
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adjust the audio quality
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adjust the picture quality
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Album
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Audio
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Encrypted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Digital broadcast
(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 33
AV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Channel
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 62, 84
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 61, 84
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . 25
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . 63
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69–71
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 44
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Amplifier, system component . . . . . . . . 16
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–17
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Copy
SD Card (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 45
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Ratings level settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 65
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–33
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18–19, 67
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 67, 84
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 65
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 85
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 65
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 65
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 85
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 13
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 27
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Subtitle
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39
Delete
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 66, 67
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 23
DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
New service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 67
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Name
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 45
New service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 67
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–33
Tuning
Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
TV Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18–19, 67
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
p
RQT8859-L
F0507YK0
|